JP2022060482A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of easily avoiding inconvenience caused by occurrence of power failure regarding a game ball entering a specific area in which a game state advantageous for a player is generated.

SOLUTION: In the case where a predetermined power failure state in which a power failure signal is confirmed continuously three times is detected by power failure monitoring processing S9202 and during a period including an approach enabled period in which an approach enabled state is generated for actuating a changeover solenoid such that a game ball can enter a specific passage TA, a main control board executes control for progressing a special game state. Therefore, even in a situation where a power failure state is generated, during a fixed period including the approach enabled period, the special game state is progressed and a situation where a game ball that is going to enter the specific passage TA is prevented from entering the specific path TA by the occurrence of power failure can be avoided.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 40

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a ball gaming machine.

A conventional gaming machine is equipped with a variable winning device that allows an entry of a gaming ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a player when the gaming ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area. There is known a gaming machine that is in an advantageous gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-028117

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there may be room for improvement in the configuration for generating a gaming state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal gaming state.

Therefore, an object of the gaming machine according to the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preferably generating a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal gaming state.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined specific game start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition is satisfied.
A determination information display means that displays information corresponding to the determination result of the determination means, and
When it is determined by the determination means that the specific game start condition is satisfied, the combination of a plurality of unit games executed based on the satisfaction of the plurality of start conditions makes the player more comfortable with the normal gaming state. A gaming machine provided with a specific gaming state control means for generating an advantageous specific gaming state.
The specific game state control means generates a plurality of types of specific game states in which at least one of the content and the grant time of the privilege given to the player is different.
The determination means determines whether or not the specific game start condition set corresponding to the plurality of types of specific game states is satisfied, and determines whether or not the specific game start condition is satisfied.
The determination information display means displays information corresponding to a specific game state in which control is started by the specific game state control means in a unit game based on a start condition in which the specific game start condition is satisfied.
Before the specific gaming state is started, which of a plurality of types of specific gaming states is to be started is selected, and information corresponding to the specific gaming state to be executed is displayed by the determination information display means. It is supposed to be.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can provide a gaming machine capable of preferably generating a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal gaming state.

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in the open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Front view of pachinko machine Front view showing the state where the front block of the pachinko machine is removed Front view of the game board Rear perspective view of pachinko machine Rear view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing Explanatory drawing for explaining a unit game that deterministically or selectively generates a reach display of a decorative symbol in a probabilistic game state. Explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of the internal state in the probabilistic gaming state Explanatory drawing for explaining the distribution of unit games that deterministically and selectively generate reach display of decorative symbols in a probabilistic game state. Explanatory drawing for explaining the distribution of unit games that deterministically or selectively generate reach display of decorative symbols in a probabilistic game state. Explanatory drawing for explaining reach production in probabilistic gaming state Flowchart showing an example of special symbol related processing in main control interrupt processing Flow chart showing an example of special symbol change start processing in special symbol related processing Flow chart showing an example of stop symbol generation processing in special symbol fluctuation start processing Explanatory diagram showing parameters for associating a jackpot symbol random value with a symbol identification value Explanatory diagram showing the correlation between the jackpot symbol random value and the symbol identification value and the mode of the special gaming state. Explanatory diagram showing the operation for generating the stop symbol identification value from the symbol identification value Explanatory diagram showing the replacement of the stop symbol identification value when the stop symbol identification value is in the range of a predetermined value. Explanatory diagram showing the correlation between the symbol identification value, the stop symbol identification value, and the light emission pattern. Flowchart showing an example of start winning process in special symbol related process Flowchart showing an example of hold information output setting process in start winning process Flow chart showing the progress of the game state Specification explanatory diagram of the game state A diagram illustrating the relationship between the progress of time and the number of acquired balls in a probabilistic gaming state. The figure which showed the flow path of the right part of a game area Structural explanatory diagram of the winning device unit Operation control explanatory diagram of the winning device unit Timing chart showing the main operation of the winning device unit Operation explanatory diagram of the winning device unit Flowchart showing an example of timer update processing Flowchart showing an example of processing during which the top prize is allowed Flowchart showing an example of processing during the prohibition of winning a prize Explanatory diagram of the mechanism for advancing a game ball into a specific passage according to a second embodiment Flow chart showing an example of power failure monitoring processing according to the second embodiment Explanatory drawing of lower prize winning device which concerns on 3rd Embodiment

Regarding the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, the pachinko machine 100 as an example of the ball game machine which is a kind of the gaming machine will be described, and then the modified example and other types of gaming machines will be described. First, with respect to the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100, a structural configuration, an electrical configuration, and various control processes will be described in order.

<Structural structure>
First, the configuration of the structural portion of the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 2 shows the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 integrated with the outer frame 101. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is open to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is open to the intermediate block 103. Shows. Further, FIG. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. In addition, various wirings are omitted in each figure, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, and each of these parts is relatively operated by a predetermined operation. It is configured to be displaceable.

The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body supporting means for supporting the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 101 is, for example, a substantially four-sided frame body to which a top plate portion 111, a bottom plate portion 112, a left side plate portion 113, and a right side plate portion 114 are assembled, and a pachinko machine 100 is installed. It is fitted into the game machine installation equipment (island equipment) provided in the game hall and is firmly fixed by a fixture (not shown). In the pachinko machine 100, the outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101, and has a main body portion corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101. A support mechanism for supporting the island and a part of the locking mechanism for locking the main body thereof may be provided in the island equipment.

Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (connected) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 rotates on one end side (left side) in the left-right direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. It is configured to be rotatable forward with the base end side and the other end side (right side) as the rotation tip side.

As shown in FIG. 1, for example, the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided apart from the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the outer frame 101. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, the shaft portion provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by the shaft support portion provided in the outer frame 101, and the shaft portion is provided in the shaft hole provided in the shaft support portion. Is configured to be rotatable by being inserted. The configuration in which the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is rotatable is not limited to the above configuration, and a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side and a shaft portion is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined removal operation, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. On the other hand, it is detachably attached. For example, by performing a predetermined removal operation of opening the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 by a certain amount or more and moving it upward by a certain amount, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released. To. As a result, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101.

The front block 102 is arranged so as to overlap the middle block 103 on the front side, and the middle block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side of the front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the front block 102 is rotatably supported forward with respect to the intermediate block 103 and can be removed by a predetermined removal operation. It is configured to be possible.

The rear block 104 is arranged so as to overlap the intermediate block 103 on the rear side, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are connected by the rear block support mechanism 136, 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side of the front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configurations as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 backward with respect to the intermediate block 103 so as to be rotatable rearward. Moreover, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined removal operation.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 includes an intermediate block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism, and a front. There is a lock operation mechanism that is operated to unlock and lock the block lock mechanism. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism exposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

When a clockwise rotation operation is performed using an operation key (not shown) as a predetermined operation for the key cylinder 141, the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 as a part of the intermediate block locking mechanism and the movable portion 143 is released, and the intermediate block 103 is in an open / closed allowable state with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates in response to the counterclockwise rotation operation by the predetermined operation key for the key cylinder 141. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 145 provided on the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism and the movable portion 144 is released, and the front block 102 is in an open / closed allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening / closing regulating mechanism that regulates the opening / closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. After that, the rear block 104 can be switched between a state in which opening and closing is prohibited (opening and closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening and closing is permitted (opening and closing permitted state) with respect to the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined operation by the rear block opening / closing regulation mechanism. It is said that.

As shown in FIG. 4, the rear block opening / closing restricting mechanism is composed of, for example, two opening / closing restricting units 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening / closing restricting unit 150C provided in the rear block 104. .. Rotating pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated are provided in these three opening / closing restricting portions 150A to 150C. By rotating the rotating pieces 151A to 151C, the engagement state with the opening portion arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction changes in the closed state of the rear block 104, whereby the open / close prohibition posture corresponding to the open / close prohibition state is changed. It is possible to switch between and the open / close allowable posture corresponding to the open / close allowable state. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are set to the open / close allowable posture, each of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the opening, and the rear block 104 is in the open / close allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. As for the open / close prohibited posture and the open / close allowable posture, the open / close prohibited state and the open / close allowable state may be switched by changing at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C, and the configuration is such that only rotation is performed at a fixed position. It may be configured to move in a certain direction, or it may be configured to operate by a combination of movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to the change in posture when the constituent members in each device shift between a plurality of postures.

Of the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, the two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to a part of them were formed in the rear block 104 in the open / closed state of the rear block 104 as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C corresponding to the remaining portion exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103 as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the open / close allowable posture only by operating from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103, thereby providing crime prevention. Has been enhanced.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement control mechanism that regulates the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, for example, the game ball movement control mechanism is composed of a combination of a flow control piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and a regulation change unit 162 provided in the front block 102. The flow control piece 161 is urged by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

In the state where the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the closed state of the front block 102), the flow control piece 161 is set to a movement allowable state that allows the flow of the game ball, and specifically, it is regulated. It is pushed toward the rear side of the intermediate block 103 by the changing portion 162. The flow control piece 161 is arranged so as to be offset to the rear side with respect to a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement allowable state. As a result, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is allowed.

On the other hand, in the state where the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the open state of the front block 102), the pressing of the flow control piece 161 by the regulation changing unit 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. The flow control piece 161 protrudes toward the front block 102, and the movement is prohibited. The flow control piece 161 protrudes into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and prevents the game ball from flowing down to the downstream side. As a result, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is prohibited.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, in the pachinko machine 100, for example, the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 at the lower end portion on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (left side when viewed from the rear). An open / close detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the switch is set is provided, and as shown in FIG. 3, for example, an intermediate block is provided at the lower end portion on the front side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (right side when viewed from the front). An open / close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed is provided for the 103.

Next, each configuration of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be described in order.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 is a substantially rectangular member that forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and has a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It has a function as a front decoration means. The front block 102 is mainly composed of a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts to the front and rear of the base frame 201. On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 forming the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A formed including the central portion of the front block 102 in front view. It is attached to. In the state where the base frame 201 constituting the front block 102 and the front decorative body 210 are combined, the opening 210A is formed through in the front-rear direction over a wide range excluding the outer peripheral portion to which the front decorative body 210 is attached. Through this opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located behind the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, and a main storage mechanism 230. It includes an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing game balls and a launch operation device 250 operated by a player to launch the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the front block 102 has an opening peripheral edge portion 211 surrounding the peripheral edge of the opening 210A and a protrusion forward on the lower side with respect to the opening 210A as a part of the front decorative body 210. Upper protrusion 217, lower protrusion 218 located below the upper protrusion 217 and protruding forward, and upper protrusion 217 and lower protrusion 217 on the right side of the lower protrusion 218. A flat portion 219, which is composed of a substantially flat region located behind 218 and in which the launch operating device 250 is arranged, is formed. The main storage mechanism 230 is arranged in the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is arranged in the lower protrusion 218.

The central panel 220 has a function as a cover body that makes it possible to visually recognize the rear side while closing the opening 210A that is formed through the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, for example, the central panel 220 has a panel frame 221 attached from the rear side of the base frame 201 (see FIG. 3) and a light transmissive fitted to the front side of the panel frame 221. A front plate 222 (see FIG. 1) and a light-transmitting rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted to the rear side of the panel frame 221 substantially in parallel with the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap. There is.

The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and game balls rented from the game field. As shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes, for example, a storage unit 231, a ball removal mechanism (not shown), and a ball removal operation member 232 for operating the ball removal mechanism. The storage unit 231 has an inflow port 231A for flowing the game ball from the inside of the pachinko machine 100 into the storage unit 231 and an outlet (not shown) for flowing out the game ball from the storage unit 231 to the inside of the pachinko machine 100. A discharge port (not shown) formed on the upstream side of the outlet is provided. By opening the discharge port, the game ball is discharged from the storage unit 231 to the player side without being taken into the inside of the pachinko machine 100. The ball removal mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game ball between the outlet and the discharge port.

The game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and the game balls lent out according to the lending operation to the lending operation device 292 described later mainly flow into the storage unit 231 through the inflow port 231A. Further, the storage unit 231 has an opening formed on the upper side, through which a game ball owned by the player is manually inserted or a game ball rented out at the game hall is supplied.

The game balls that have flowed into the storage unit 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outlet and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1) while being arranged in a row. When the ball pulling operation (for example, pressing operation) is not performed on the ball pulling operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through the outlet. On the other hand, when the ball pulling operation is performed on the ball pulling operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes the storage unit 241 having the inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and the discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) of the game ball, and the discharge port 241B. It is provided with a ball pulling mechanism 243 for causing the ball to be pulled out, and a ball pulling operation member 242 for operating the ball pulling mechanism 243. The game balls and the like acquired according to the progress of the game mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but if the storage unit 231 is full, they flow into the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241A. Further, the game ball flows from the storage unit 231 to the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241C even when the ball removal operation for the ball removal operation member 232 is performed.

The bottom surface of the reservoir 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the discharge port 241B is opened by a ball removal operation (for example, a pressing operation) with respect to the ball removal operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage unit 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. When the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball pulling operation on the ball pulling operation member 242, the discharge port 241B remains in the opened state until the returning operation (for example, the pressing operation again) is performed on the ball pulling operation member 242. Be maintained. Behind the inflow port 241A, a ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the launch operation device 250 includes a pedestal 251 projecting forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, and a rotatable launch handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251. A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotation of the launch handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that the player is in contact with the launch handle 252, and the launch handle 252. It includes a launch stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) that invalidates the ejection of the game ball due to the rotation operation by the operation of the player. When the firing handle 252 is rotated by the player, the game ball is ejected from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount. If the contact sensor 254 does not detect contact between the launch handle 252 and the player, or if the launch operation is invalidated by the operation of the launch stop switch 255, the launch handle 252 is rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the launcher 330.

Further, a frame light emitting device 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10) is provided behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are arranged so as to overlap the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge portion 211 includes an upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left side edge portion 211B and an upper right side edge portion 211C located on both left and right sides with respect to the upper central edge portion 211A, and an upper left side edge portion. It has a left side edge portion 211D located on the lower side with respect to the 211B and a right side edge portion 211E located on the lower side with respect to the upper right side edge portion 211C as a light emitting portion, and frame emission corresponding to each light emitting portion. Devices 271 to 275 are installed.

The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 include an upper center frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left side edge portion 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting device corresponding to the upper right side edge portion 211C. It is composed of an apparatus 273, a left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge portion 211D, and a right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge portion 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 electrically connects one or a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) as light emitting means, electronic components such as resistors for controlling the LEDs, and these electronic components in an integrated manner. It has a printed circuit board.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with an upper left acoustic output port 211F and an upper right acoustic output port 211G, for example, above the opening peripheral edge portion 211, and these upper left acoustic output ports 211F. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to the upper right acoustic output port 211G and the upper right acoustic output port 211G, respectively. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located behind (rearward) the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with a game ball lending device 290, for example, on the upper right side portion of the upper protruding portion 217. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays numerical values according to the balance of bills, cards, etc. inserted in a card unit (not shown) arranged side by side in the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending device. It includes a lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning banknotes, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit. When a banknote, a card, or the like is inserted into the card unit and a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in the valid state in which the numerical value corresponding to the amount of money is displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. Accordingly, a predetermined number of game balls are lent out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated with the rent out of the game balls. On the other hand, when the return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, the equivalent of the banknote corresponding to the balance and the card recording the balance are returned from the card unit according to the return operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 capable of performing an input operation different from the launch operation by the player. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a press operation device 261 capable of pushing operation, a rotation operation device 262 capable of rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 capable of up / down / left / right direction operation. With these operation devices 261 to 263, an effect selection operation for selecting an effect to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation for setting the volume and light amount of each device for executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player. It is possible to execute production setting operations that enable the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the previous game by inputting information, and these operations can be executed by the player or the manager of the game hall as necessary. It is said that. The input operation unit (for example, the annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) that the player contacts in the input operation device 260 is rotated, moved up and down, or moved by the input operation unit driving means such as a motor or a solenoid. It is preferable that the operation such as vibration is configured to be feasible by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), either before or after the input operation, or during the input operation. By operating the input portion at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effects accompanied by the input operation, such as actively encouraging the input operation.

Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a member having a substantially rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and a function of integrating the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 by attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts including the game board 400 to the base frame 301.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and a base frame. A game board support mechanism that rotatably and detachably supports the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. Based on commands from the launcher 330 (see FIG. 3) that ejects, the main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) that is mounted on the back side of the game board 400 and controls the game progress in an integrated manner, and the main control device 370. It is equipped with a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) that controls game production and status notification.

As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 301 includes a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding the game ball discharged from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, to the front block 102 is formed therein. A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B in which the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wirings inserted through the opening 301B are various devices (for example, frame light emitting devices 271 to 271) provided in the front block 102. 275, upper left acoustic device 281 and upper right acoustic device 282) for electrically connecting devices provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 (for example, main control device 370 and sub control device 390). The signal relay device 311 including wiring has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 includes a flat plate-shaped base 401 having a through hole through which a game ball such as a discharge port 401A can pass back and forth, and an outer rail that smoothly curves from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401. The 402, the inner rail 403 that smoothly curves from the lower right to the upper left of the substrate 401, the return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the upper left tip of the inner rail 403, and the upper right tip of the outer rail 402. It is provided with a recoil prevention member 405 to be attached. The outer rail 402 guides the game ball launched from the launching device 330, which will be described later, into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once released into the game area from the launch passage 401B formed in the portion where the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 face each other in parallel to return to the launch passage 401B. The recoil prevention member 405 has a shock absorbing property that prevents a large recoil of the game ball such that the game ball heading to the right side beyond the upper center of the game board 400 returns to the left side via the upper center again. However, it is made of a material such as vibration damping rubber.

As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage portion 163 is formed in the lower portion on the back surface side of the front block 102. There is a gap between the guiding member 335 that guides the game ball from the launching device 330 toward the launching passage 401B and the outer rail 402, and the ball is launched from the launching device 330 but does not exceed the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning back from the passage 401B is returned from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below this gap.

The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area and moves (flows down) while falling in the game area due to its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is divided into a shape in which most of the area has a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The game area is generally divided into an outer peripheral portion by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is divided into a substantially flat shape by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is substantially flat by the base 401 of the game board 400. It is divided into. Various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the launching device 330 includes a ball feeding mechanism 331 that sequentially sends the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to the firing position, and a ball feeding solenoid 332 that drives the ball feeding mechanism 331 (FIG. 10). (See), the launch mechanism 333 that ejects the game ball arranged at the launch position, the launch solenoid 334 that drives the launch mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and the game ball launched from the launch mechanism 333 of the game board 400. It is provided with a guiding member 335 for guiding to the launch passage 401B. As described above, the launching device 330 operates in response to the launching operation on the launching operation device 250, and the drive control of the launching solenoid 334 changes according to the launching operation on the launching operation device 250 to adjust the launching force.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 371 having a split structure for accommodating the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed inside a translucent board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

Further, the main control device 370 is rotatably attached to the back surface side of the game board 400. Specifically, the mounting portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the base 401 of the game board 400 on the back side, and the main control device 370 is mounted on the mounting portion 372. As a result, not only the back side (front side) of the main control device 370, but also the front side (back side) of the main control device 370 by rotating the mounting portion 372, the main control device 370 is attached to the game board 400. It is said that it can be easily confirmed with it attached. The main control device 370 may be connected to the mounting portion 372 so as not to be removed without leaving a trace, and the removal status of the main control device 370 may be easily managed.

The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 391 having a split structure for accommodating the sub-control board 940. The sub-control board 940 is housed in a translucent board case 391 sealed so as not to be opened without leaving a trace like the main control board 920, and the game board 400 is housed in the sub-control board 940. It is attached to the back side.

Here, various structures arranged in the game area on the game board 400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base 401, a flow change member such as a nail 411 and a windmill 412 that change the flow direction and flow speed of a game ball, and a center arranged substantially in the center of the base 401. The structure 420, the starting device according to the first special symbol arranged below the central structure 420 (specifically, the upper middle starting winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B) and the center. A starting device (specifically, a right starting winning device 432) arranged on the lower right side of the structure 420 and a large winning device 433 arranged below the right starting winning device 432. , 434 (specifically, the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434), the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol arranged on the upper side (upstream side) of the right starting winning device 432, and the game board 400. The combination operating device 435 located on the upper right side and above (upstream side) with respect to the upper and lower large winning devices 433 and 434, and the general winning device 439A arranged on both the left and right sides of the lower middle starting winning device 431B. , 439B and.

Further, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball corresponding to the above-mentioned upper middle start winning device 431A and the like (see FIG. 10), and corresponds to each switch. It is possible to detect the entry of a game ball into a predetermined area. For example, a middle start winning switch (upper middle start winning switch 441A) that detects a game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 431A, and a middle start winning switch (lower) that detects a game ball that has entered the lower middle start winning device 431B. Side middle start winning switch 441B), right starting winning switch 442 to detect the game ball that entered the right starting winning device 432, lower big winning switch 443 to detect the game ball that entered the lower big winning device 433, upper big winning device Top prize switch 444 that detects the game ball that has entered 434, the combination operation switch 445 that detects the game ball that has entered the combination operation device 435, the start switch 446 that detects the game ball that has entered the start device 436, and below. Non-specific passage switch 447 that detects a game ball that has entered the non-specific passage TB (see FIG. 32 (A)) formed inside the grand prize device 433, and the specific passage TA formed inside the lower grand prize device 433. A specific passage switch 448 for detecting a game ball that has entered (see FIG. 32 (A)), a general winning switch 449A, 449B for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning devices 439A, 439B, and the like are installed on the game board 400. ing.

The entrance portion of the game ball of the central structure 420 and the starting device 436 constitutes an entry port, and the game ball that has entered each entry port is discharged to the game area. Games of each winning device, specifically, the upper middle starting winning device 431A, the lower middle starting winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433, the upper big winning device 434 and the general winning device 439A, 439B. The entrance portion of the ball constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball entering each winning opening is guided to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the substrate 401 through a through hole formed in the substrate 401. .. Further, the game ball that has not entered each winning device is guided to the collection / discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided on the most downstream side portion of the game area. The game balls guided to the collection / discharge passage are discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game field. When a game ball enters any of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls according to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). Each winning device may be configured separately from other winning devices, or is a device in which two or more winning devices (for example, an upper middle starting winning device 431A and a lower middle starting winning device 431B) are integrated. The winning device may be configured by the above, and the starting device such as the upper middle starting winning device 431A does not necessarily have to be a winning slot in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the game balls enter. It may be used as an entrance where the ball is released again into the game area without being paid out.

Each of the upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B, and the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B related to the first special symbol does not change the entry probability of the game ball and enters them. The game ball is guided to the back side of the base 401. Further, the right-starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the probability of the game ball entering the inside thereof. It should be noted that the mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball does not need to be provided only in the starting device related to the second special symbol, and instead of or in addition to the starting device related to the first special symbol, the general winning device. It may be provided in one or more of 439A and 439B. Further, the mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball may be configured by a driving means such as an electrically driven solenoid, or may be represented by a mechanism that operates by the weight of the game ball that has entered a predetermined area. It may be configured by a mechanism that operates mechanically.

The right start winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a right entry control mechanism 452 and a right entry control mechanism that change the entry probability of the game ball into the inside by shifting between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture. It is equipped with a right entry control solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) that drives the 452. The right entry control mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces driven by the right entry control solenoid 462, and when the right entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the two movable pieces enter the entrance (winning opening). ) Can be narrowed (or closed) so that the game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 432, but when the right entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry allowable posture, two movable pieces are at their tips. By arranging the portions so that the distance between the portions is widened, the game ball can enter the right start winning device 432. The right entry control mechanism 452 enters right when the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol is won by a lottery based on the detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter, also referred to as "normal symbol lottery"). According to the drive by the regulation solenoid 462, the posture shifts to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 7, the lower prize winning device 433 has a lower entry control mechanism 453 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the lower entry regulation mechanism. The game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 by the transition between the lower entry control solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 453 and the non-guided posture and the guided posture is entered into the non-specific passage TB or the specific passage. A distribution mechanism 601 that distributes to TA and takes an approach-allowed posture and an entry-prohibited posture with respect to a specific passage TA, and a switching solenoid 465 that switches the guidance destination of the game ball by changing the posture of the distribution mechanism 601 (see FIG. 10). ) And are provided. When the lower entry control mechanism 453 of the lower prize winning device 433 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball cannot enter the lower prize winning device 433 because the lower entry control mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning opening). When the lower entry control mechanism 453 is in the approach allowable posture, the lower entry control mechanism 453 opens the entrance so that the game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 433. Further, the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 is guided to the non-specific passage TB when the distribution mechanism 601 is in a non-guided posture protruding forward, and the distribution mechanism 601 is immersed in the rearward guided posture. If it is, it is guided to the specific passage TA. The specific passage TA, the non-specific passage TB, and the distribution mechanism 601 are provided to diversify the transition of the gaming state, and when the game ball enters the specific passage TA, the gaming state is advantageous as a privilege to the player. Is given.

As shown in FIG. 7, the upper prize winning device 434 has an upper entry control mechanism 454 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the upper entry regulation mechanism. An upper entry control solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the attitude of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the upper entry control mechanism 454 is in the no-entry posture, the upper entry control mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning opening) so that the game ball cannot enter the upper prize winning device 434, but the upper entry control mechanism 454. When the player is in the admissible posture, the game ball can enter the upper prize winning device 434 by opening the entrance of the upper entry control mechanism 454.

As for the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball into the inside of the right entry restriction mechanism 452 or the like, each mechanism is configured and the winning opening (or entry opening) of each device is used. Corresponding to the posture change of the operating member that switches between the special state in which the game ball can enter and the normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the positions and orientations of the operating member differs depending on each posture. All you need is. Further, as a mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball such as the right entry control mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter into the normal state, and the game ball is allowed to enter even in the normal state, which is special. In the state, the posture of the operating member may be changed to a state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in the normal state.

A game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 when a big hit lottery is won. Specifically, the game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning device 431B according to the first special symbol is detected by the upper middle starting winning switch 441A or the lower middle starting winning switch 441B. When a lottery based on (hereinafter also referred to as "first special symbol lottery") is won, or a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442. When the lottery based on (hereinafter, also referred to as "second special symbol lottery") is won, at least one of the lower entry control solenoid 463 and the upper entry control solenoid 464 is operated. By this operation, at least one of the lower entry control mechanism 453 and the upper approach control mechanism 454 takes an approach allowable posture for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times. Further, the distribution mechanism 601 shifts to the guided posture according to the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time from the shift to the approach allowable posture of the lower approach restricting mechanism 453, and further shifts to the guided posture after a predetermined time from the shift to the guided posture. It returns to the non-inductive posture according to the stop of the switching solenoid 465.

The combination operating device 435 is a device for setting the conditions necessary for the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 to start operation. After winning the big hit lottery, either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 starts operating on condition that the game ball of the winning combination operating device 435 passes. Therefore, when the player wins the big hit, the player can start the special gaming state at the timing intended by the player. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to configure either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 to start the operation on condition that the game ball of the combination operating device 435 passes, and instead of or instead of it. In addition, either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 may be configured to start operation after a lapse of a predetermined time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 is integrated with display devices 471 to 473 that display variation display of symbols and lottery results, and display devices 476 to 478 that display the number of times the game is held. A display having a plurality of light emitting units is provided in a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are divided in advance in the light emitting region corresponding to each device, and the state of each device is displayed by the light emitting state.

Specifically, on the game board 400, the first special symbol is variablely displayed in accordance with the first special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A second special symbol display device 471 related to a special symbol, a second special symbol that is variablely displayed in accordance with the second special symbol lottery, and a second special symbol that is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 472 related to a special symbol, a special symbol hold display device 476 that displays the number of times a unit game is held related to a first special symbol, and a special symbol hold that displays the number of times a unit game is held related to a second special symbol. A display device 477 is provided. The right to the unit game related to the first special symbol and the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol are reserved up to four times each. Here, the unit game is a game for one time executed based on one start winning, a winning / failing determination of a lottery executed based on one starting winning, and a lottery based on the winning / failing determination. It refers to a series of games including from the start to the end of the variable display until the result is displayed.

When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the start winning device 431 is the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) or the lower middle starting winning switch. Even if it is detected by 441B (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, it is assumed that the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 is detected by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10). However, the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol is not added.

Each of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). .. Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is represented by a light emission pattern of a plurality of light emitting units (a combination of light emission states (lighting, lighting, blinking) including a light emitting color). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol determine the number of hold times by the combination of the light emitting states (turning off, lighting, blinking) of the two monochromatic light emitting units. indicate.

Further, the game board 400 relates to a normal symbol display device 473, which displays the normal symbol in a variable manner along with the normal symbol lottery, and confirms and displays the normal symbol as a stop symbol according to the lottery result, and the normal symbol. An ordinary symbol hold display device 478 that displays the number of hold times of the right of the unit game is provided. The right to unit games related to ordinary symbols is reserved up to 4 times. When the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not added even if the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446.

The ordinary symbol display device 473 is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). An ordinary pattern is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting parts. Further, the normal symbol hold display device 478 displays the number of holds by the combination of the light emitting states (turning off, lighting, blinking) of the two single-color light emitting units.

Further, on the game board 400, the decorative symbols may be variablely displayed or the decorative symbols may be confirmed and displayed in the unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol so as to overlap the rear of the central structure 420. A decorative pattern display device 479 is provided. The variable display and the final display of the decorative symbol are controlled by the sub control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and the final display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, more complicated and diverse effects are executed than in the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It should be noted that the variable display and confirmation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variable display and final display of the decorative symbol do not always start to change at the timing when they completely match, or stop display as a final display. It is not necessary, and the fluctuation may be started at substantially the same timing while providing a slight time difference at each timing, and the confirmation display may be performed at substantially the same timing.

Further, the game board 400 includes a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board surface light emitting device 490 accompanies the progress of the game based on the control by the sub-control board 940. Performs various light emission effects and status notification by light emission.

Here, various gaming states and transitions between gaming states will be described. The normal gaming state (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "normal gaming state") is a state in which the variation display time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is long (hereinafter, also referred to as "non-time saving state"). handle.

If a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage TA (internal passage of the lower prize winning device 433) during the special gaming state that shifts based on the winning. The game state that shifts after the special game state differs depending on whether or not the game is played. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA during the special game state, the variation display time of the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is shorter than the non-time reduction state (hereinafter, "time reduction"). A gaming state in which the winning probability of a big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a "low probability state"). (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as "short-time game state"). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage TA during the special game state, the time is shortened and the probability of winning the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than in the normal game state. It shifts to a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a "probability variable gaming state") which is a state (hereinafter also referred to as a "high probability state").

The time-saving game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), after which the game returns to the normal game state. Further, the probabilistic game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), but then returns to the normal game state.

It should be noted that the transition between the gaming state and the gaming state does not necessarily have to be the above-mentioned configuration. For example, the high-probability state may be configured to continue until the next big hit is won, or the above-mentioned gaming state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a configuration may further include a gaming state different from each of the above-mentioned gaming states, or a configuration may be configured in which the gaming states are shifted under conditions different from the above-mentioned conditions.

Next, the operation of the main device of the game board 400 will be described generally in chronological order. In the main control board 920, a winning random number, a big hit symbol random number, a stop pattern random number, and various variation pattern random numbers related to the special symbol (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated, and various game states are generated. When a game ball that has entered any of the start winning devices 431A and 431B related to the first special symbol is detected by any of the middle start winning switch 441A and 441B (see FIG. 10), the start winning of the first special symbol It becomes. If the right to the unit game related to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the first special symbol, the winning random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the stop pattern random number related to the special symbol are acquired. It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

The unit game with random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol is neither in the special game state nor in the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the unit game related to the first special symbol. If the rights to are not reserved, they will be started immediately after the storage of those random numbers. In addition, even if the player is not in the special game state, the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved. After the end of the unit game related to all the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) held before the current prize, the unit game based on the current start prize is started. If each random number is acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol during the special game state, the unit game by the random number is all held before the current start prize after the special game state. It starts after the unit game related to the special symbol.

Further, the unit game with random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol is started after the end of all the unit games related to the second special symbol. That is, when each random number is acquired based on the start prize of the second special symbol after the current start prize, the unit game based on the start prize of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. It should be noted that the unit game based on the start prize of the second special symbol does not necessarily have to be executed in preference to the unit game related to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not necessarily executed in the order of the start prize. It may be a configuration in which the unit superiority control according to the above is executed, or a configuration in which the two special symbols are not alternative and can be changed at the same time.

If a big hit is won in the 1st special symbol lottery based on the start prize of the 1st special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit winning of the 1st special symbol lottery based on the acquired big hit symbol random number ( The type of jackpot symbol) is determined. The type of the stop symbol corresponds to the type of the jackpot. A plurality of types of jackpots are set according to the type of gaming state such as the gaming state (whether or not to shift to the probabilistic gaming state) that shifts after the special gaming state, and the jackpot symbol is set for each type. If the jackpot is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a lost symbol different from the jackpot symbol is set as the stop symbol.

After the first special symbol lottery, the first special is based on the current game state, lottery result, stop pattern random number value, various fluctuation pattern random number values, and the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is held. The variation display time of the symbol is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected. After that, the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the variable display (variable effect) of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 are started, and the first special symbol is varied. The variable display according to a constant pattern is continued over the display time, and in the case of the decorative design, the variable display according to the variable display is continued over the variable display time. After that, as the variation display time elapses, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a decorative symbol. The definite display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined fixed time.

When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state after the confirmation display of the first special symbol. In the special gaming state, the lower entry control mechanism 453 of the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper entry control mechanism 454 of the upper prize winning device 434 are in the entry allowable posture a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of jackpot. .. When a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the large winning switch 443, 444 or a predetermined maximum during each approach allowable posture in the lower approach control mechanism 453 and the upper approach control mechanism 454. When the permissible approach time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry control mechanism 453 or the upper entry control mechanism 454 shifts to the no-entry posture. Then, after the lapse of the predetermined entry prohibition time, either the lower entry control mechanism 453 or the upper entry control mechanism 454 returns to the approach allowable posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

The lower approach control mechanism 453 and the upper approach control mechanism 454 are configured so that only one of them takes an approach allowable posture during the special gaming state, and after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special gaming state (after the opening period). ), One shifts to the first permissible posture. In addition, the special gaming state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses from the return to the entry prohibition posture in the final round, and then a predetermined waiting time elapses (after the ending period). After the end of the special gaming state, as described above, the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state.

In various game states, when the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442, the start winning of the second special symbol is obtained. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is acquired and the unit game based on this starting prize is executed. Will be done. Further, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, the execution of the variation display, the transition control of the gaming state, etc. are also executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol. Will be done.

In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the start device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, if the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times, the winning random number related to the normal symbol is acquired. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is not in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started immediately after the storage. On the other hand, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started after the unit game based on the right of the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is completed.

In the unit game related to the normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol is won based on the value of the winning random number, and if the winning symbol is won, a predetermined winning symbol is set as the stop symbol. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won, a predetermined lost symbol is set as the stop symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display device 473, and in the non-time reduction state, the fluctuation display by a constant pattern is continued for a predetermined variation display time, and the time reduction state is achieved. Continues the variable display according to a constant pattern over a predetermined variable display time shorter than the non-time saving state. With the passage of a predetermined time according to the game state, the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is fixedly displayed for a certain period of time.

When the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the right approach control mechanism 452 of the right start winning device 432 shifts to the approach allowable posture at least once after the confirmation display of the normal symbol. Specifically, when the player wins in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state and special gaming state), the right start winning device 432 allows entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 0.1 second). In the case of winning in the time saving state (time saving gaming state and probabilistic gaming state) after shifting to the state, the predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 4.8 seconds) longer than that in the case where the right start winning device 432 is in the non-time saving state. ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three times) to shift to the approach allowable posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 442, the right entry control mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the elapse of the maximum entry allowable time. Further, even if the number of transitions to the approach allowable posture has not reached a predetermined number of times, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game related to the normal symbol this time is completed.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, first, a winner must be won in the ordinary symbol lottery, and further, the game ball enters the right start winning device 432 in the entry allowable state of the right starting winning device 432 based on the winning. Must. The winning probability related to the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the staying time in the entry allowable state of the right-starting winning device 432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, omitted). Since 0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely short compared to the staying time in the time-saving state (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds), the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state. Is significantly smaller than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery. On the contrary, in the time-saving state such as the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the opportunity per unit time for receiving the second special symbol lottery is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time for receiving the first special symbol lottery. ..

Therefore, the player wins a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, the player plays with the aim of shifting to the probabilistic game state by allowing the game ball to enter the specific passage TA. On the other hand, in the short-time game state and the probabilistic game state, the game is played with the aim of winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery before each game state ends.

Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 in the central part of the game area where the game ball flows down, and a game method (left-handed game) in which the game ball flows down mainly from the left side of the central structure 420. The method) and the game method (right-handed game method) in which the game ball is mainly flowed down from the right side of the central structure 420 can be selectively performed. The player plays the game by the left-handed game method in the normal game state, and plays the game by the right-handed game method in the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state. Further, since the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the game is played by the right-handed gaming method even in the special gaming state.

Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching other members or devices to the substrate 501. By connecting the substrate 501 and the intermediate block 103 by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, the rear block 104 is openably and closably supported with respect to the intermediate block 103.

The rear block 104 continuously rectifies the game ball tank 510 as a ball storage unit for storing the game ball and the game ball on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 (for example, in one row) and arranges them in one stage. A tank rail 520 as a ball alignment part, a case rail 530 as a ball guiding part for guiding a game ball flowing in from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball payout on the downstream side of the case rail 530. Guidance as a ball guiding unit that guides the payout device 540 that executes the rental of the game ball and the game ball that has flowed out from the payout device 540 on the downstream side of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed on the base 501. The member 550, the payout control device 560 that controls the payout of the game ball and the lending of the game ball by the payout device 540, and the power supply that converts the external power into the power of a predetermined voltage required by various devices and outputs the power. A power supply / launch control device 570 and a payout control device 560 having a function as a means and a function as a launch control means for controlling the ejection of a game ball based on a launch operation to the launch operation device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920. It also includes a game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1) and a relay device 950 that relays a signal between a card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 100.

The substrate 501 is integrally molded with a resin (for example, ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front side portion and a protective cover portion 503 located behind the base portion 502. The upper portion of the base portion 502 is formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and the lower portion is formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction, and other devices can be attached to the base portion 502. It has a function as a mounted part to be attached.

The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. Further, the protective cover portion 503 does not have a shape that covers the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but a part of the back surface of the intermediate block 103 that needs to be frequently inspected and confirmed, such as a part of the main control device 370, is the back surface of the pachinko machine 100. It is set to a size that forms a window for exposure to. On the back surface of the protective cover portion 503, a large number of ventilation holes 503A having a function of improving heat dissipation in the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed.

The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container that opens upward, and game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of an island facility are sequentially replenished to one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof. An opening (not shown) is formed in the game ball tank 510 at one end side in the longitudinal direction different from the side to which the game ball is supplied. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. Further, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is inclined in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (front-back direction) as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). .. Further, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential in the game ball tank 510 and inside the game ball tank 510. The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows in through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 is gradually heightened as a passage forming member 521 forming a passage of a substantially gutter-shaped game ball having a width through which the game balls pass in a row, and an upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. It is provided with a rectifying member 522 having a top surface portion having a lower top surface and gradually rectifying a game ball flowing down the passage from a height overlapped vertically to a height of one step. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510.

The case rail 530 is vertically elongated so as to be continuous with the lower side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows into the case rail 530. The case rail 530 is curved to the left and right so that the game ball does not flow vigorously and is continuous downward. Further, a storage ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10) for detecting a broken ball is attached to an intermediate portion of the ball passage in the case rail 530. The storage ball switch 591 detects a ball out state in which the game ball is not normally replenished in the case rail 530 due to ball clogging or the like occurring on the case rail 530 or the upstream side thereof.

The payout device 540 includes a payout mechanism for sending out the game ball, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a drive means for driving the payout mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game ball stored in the ball passage is discharged to the downstream side. The passage of the released game ball through the ball passage is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of payouts of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply / emission control device 570 are mounted so as to overlap the lower back surface of the base portion 502 of the substrate 501 so as to be located at the lower rear surface side of the rear block 104. Has been done. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply / launch control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to a model change or the like.

The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case for accommodating the payout control board 930, and the payout control board 930 does not leave a trace of opening like the main control board 920. It is housed inside a board case that is sealed so that it cannot be opened.

The power supply / launch control device 570 includes a power supply / launch control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case for accommodating the power supply / launch control board 900, and the power supply / launch control board 900 is the same as the main control board 920. It is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply / emission control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. Note that in FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Hereinafter, these main control circuit devices will be described in detail individually.

The power supply / launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies electric power of a predetermined voltage to each part of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a launch device according to the operation of the launch operation device 250. It includes a launch control unit 902 that controls the drive of the 330, and a signal relay unit 903 that relays the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and the ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249.

The power supply unit 901 takes in external electric power (for example, AC 24 volt) supplied from the outside and converts it into internal power (for example, DC 24 volt), and generates various electric power from the internal power. The electric power generated by the power supply unit 901 is the electric power of the driving voltage (for example, 12 volt DC) for driving various devices such as solenoids and various motors, and drives various switches and executes control processing. It includes the power of the control voltage (for example, 5 volt DC) for the operation, the power of the backup voltage for holding the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

The power supply unit 901 supplies various electric powers generated from the internal electric power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, the power supply monitoring board 910 is supplied with internal power, drive voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage. Powers of a drive voltage, a control voltage, and a backup voltage are supplied to the main control board 920, and these powers are supplied via the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Power of the driving voltage and the control voltage is supplied to the payout control board 930. Power of the driving voltage and the control voltage is supplied to the sub-control board 940. The drive voltage and the control voltage are supplied to the emission control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903.

A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in the off state, the intake of external power is stopped. The pachinko machine can be used by turning off the power switch 909 or disconnecting the power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 via the power switch 909 from the external power supply outlet (not shown). A state in which the supply of electric power to the inside of the machine 100 is stopped or a state in which the supply of external electric power itself is stopped is collectively referred to as a "power failure state".

The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the power of the control voltage for a predetermined period even after the transition to the power failure state. As a result, the main control board 920 can save the state and end the control so that it can return to the current control state.

The launch control unit 902 controls the drive of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 of the launch device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920. The ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 are permitted to operate when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it is detected based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254 that the player is touching the launch handle 252 (see FIG. 1), and the launch stop switch 255 for stopping the launch is set. On condition that it is not operated, the launch control unit 902 outputs a launch permission signal in the ON state to the main control board 920. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a launch solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the launch control unit 902 based on the launch permission signal and the launch abnormality signal. The launch control unit 902 operates the ball feed solenoid 332 based on the ball feed control signal in the on state, and operates the launch solenoid 334 based on the reception of the launch solenoid control signal in the on state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let me. As a result, the game balls are sequentially launched from the launching device 330 with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252).

The signal relay unit 903 outputs an ON-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. In the main control board 920, the stored information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 is initialized in response to the reception of the initialization signal in the ON state. The initialization switch 907 does not necessarily have to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay unit 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 may be directly mounted on the main control board 920. The initialization switch 907 may be housed in the board case 371, whereby it is possible to suppress an illegal signal input targeting a section in which a signal is transmitted.

Further, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. In the main control board 920, a low-speed payout signal is output to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 receiving the low-speed payout signal is the rotation speed (payout) of the payout motor 542. The payout speed of the game ball from the device 540) is slowed down. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 receiving the high-speed payout signal determines the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Speed up.

The power supply monitoring board 910 transmits power supply and transmission of various signals between the power supply monitoring unit 911 that monitors the power supply status from the power supply / emission control board 900, the power supply / emission control board 900, and the main control board 920. It includes a signal relay unit 912 to be relayed. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901, and this When the state where the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the power failure state is established, and the power failure signal in the ON state is output to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

The main control board 920 comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. The main control board 920 is equipped with an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU has a CPU as an arithmetic processing unit (not shown), a ROM (not shown) that stores various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily when the control program is executed. It includes a RAM (not shown) for storing etc. In addition, various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted on the main control board 920. There is. The RAM of the main control board 920 has a configuration in which internal data can be maintained (backed up) by supplying power of the backup voltage from the power supply / emission control board 900 even after the transition to the power failure state.

The payout control board 930 controls the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 540 according to the instruction from the main control board 920 and the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 540 according to the operation of the game ball lending device 290. Similar to the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. Various circuits such as (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted. The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information communication is possible. For example, bidirectional information input / output communication is possible between the main control board 920 and the relay device 950. The open / close detection switch 108, 109, the storage ball switch 591, and the payout counting switch 592 are connected to each other so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is connected to only one-way information. Only output communication is possible and connected. The RAM of the payout control board 930 may be configured to have a backup function capable of maintaining internal data for a certain period of time in a power failure state, like the RAM of the main control board 920, or the RAM of the main control board 920. Unlike the configuration, the internal data may not be maintained in a power failure state.

The sub control board 940 controls the operation of various effect devices, various light emitting devices, various sound devices, and the like based on the instructions from the main control board 920. The sub-control board 940 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information can be communicated. For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. , It is connected to the input operation device 260 so as to be capable of information communication in both directions, and is connected to the decorative symbol display device 479 or the like so as to be able to perform information output communication only in one direction.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing on the main control board 920 is roughly divided into the main processing that is started when the power is restored from a power failure state and the main processing that is periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 ms (milliseconds)) interrupted and executed. It consists of timer interrupt processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 11, the main process executed by the main control board 920 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the main process of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 11).

In the main process of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processes (program start process S1001 to random number initial setting process S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information are executed only once. After that, the interrupt prohibition process S1020 that prohibits the interrupt, the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), and the normal symbol related to the special symbol are used. The random number initial value update process S1021 that updates the value of the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), and the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type for determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The variable counter update process S1022 for updating the value of the counter (a part of the area of the RAM) and the interrupt permission process S1023 for permitting an interrupt are repeatedly executed. If a timer interrupt request occurs before the interrupt enable process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt enable process S1023.

In a series of control start processes, the program start process S1001 that sets the initial value in the stack pointer (a part of the area of the RAM) that controls the execution of the program, the interrupt mode setting process S1002 that sets the interrupt mode, and the payout control board. The start-up standby process S1003, which waits for a predetermined time until the 930, the sub-control board 940, and the like start up, is executed.

After the startup standby process S1003, the determination process S1004 of the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power supply / emission control board 900, the determination process S1005 of the value of the power failure information (a part of the RAM), and the storage. The information storage state determination process S1007 is performed, and it is determined whether or not to erase the stored information in the RAM based on these determination results. Here, the stored information is information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power failure, and corresponds to a part of the area of the RAM that was updated according to the progress of the game before the power failure, and is executed. Examples include the value of the counter related to the unit game in the game, the value of the counter stored by the start winning prize, and the like.

The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, the checksum value for the storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation process S1006), and the current checksum value and the power failure monitoring process S1202 (see FIG. 12) are accompanied by the transition to the previous power failure state. ) Is determined whether or not the exclusive OR with the RAM determination value, which is the two's complement of the checksum value calculated in), is “0” (determination process S1007), whereby the current checksum value and the current checksum value are determined. It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

When the initialization signal is on (S1004: Y), when the power failure information is not a predetermined power failure value indicating that the stored information has been saved and terminated at the time of transition to the power failure state (S1005: N), or saved. When the information is not normally held (S1007: N), the RAM clear process S1008 for erasing the RAM storage information is executed. Hardware that initializes various devices connected to the main control board 920 after it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y) or after the RAM clear processing S1008 is executed. The hardware initialization process S1009 is executed.

After the hardware initialization process S1009, the determination process S1010 for determining whether or not the power failure information is the power failure value is executed. When the power failure information is the power failure value (S1010: N), the RAM return setting process S1011 for initializing various information including the recovery of the retained information and the return command indicating the completion of the setting are set (return command). Output processing S1012). By the restoration of the holding information in the RAM restoration setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 is restored to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

On the other hand, when the power failure information is not the power failure value (S1010: Y), various information are initialized (RAM initial setting process S1013) without restoring the retained information, and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. (Initialization command output process S1014).

In the RAM recovery setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error states such as an error detection error immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state are performed. Even if is occurring, all those error states are cleared. Further, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 receive the return command or the initialization command. A predetermined initialization process is also executed in each of the above.

After the initial setting of the RAM according to the situation at the time of startup (determination process S1004 to initialization command output process S1014), if the condition device is operating at the time of the previous transition to the power failure state, the special gaming state is set. Preparations for returning are performed (special game state return preparation process S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operating state of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device is determined, and the process corresponding to the game state in the power failure state is executed on the sub-control board 940. To.

After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether the time saving state is the time saving state or the non-time saving state by determining whether or not the time saving state flag is set (determination process S1016), and the time saving state is reached. In the case (S1016: Y), the time saving command is output (time saving command output processing S1017). On the other hand, in the non-time saving state (S1016: N), the non-time saving command is output (non-time saving command output process S1018). After that, the value of the winning random number counter (a part of the area of the RAM) related to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting process S1019).

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, the interrupt start process S1201 for starting the timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. This prohibits interrupts other than this timer interrupt. After that, the power failure monitoring process S1202 to the external information output process S1221 related to substantial control such as game progress control of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors are sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on the detection of various frauds (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the external information output process S1221 are not executed. Finally, the interrupt enable process S1222 that permits the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. In the following, various main processes will be described individually.

In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (a part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the on state is detected three times, the power failure state is determined. If it is not determined in this determination that the power is in a power failure state, the power failure information is maintained at the energized value.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the power failure monitoring process S1202 that the power is in a power failure state, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM recovery setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. Further, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and the two's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop that does not substantially control the progress of the game, monitoring of various sensors, etc., and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is maintained based on the backup power. To. Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, and the special symbol is used. If the value of the winning random number counter related to is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). However, if the changed value is the same as the circular initial value for the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol. Is set to the value of, and the circulation initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

The big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are also updated in the same manner as in the case of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. However, as the update range defined by the specified maximum value and specified minimum value of each counter, a value unique to each counter is set, and multiple counters are configured to be updated asynchronously, and the circulation initial value of each counter is set. Refers to the initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol have the same value range, and the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range. The range of values is the same for the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol.

In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, if the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, which is special. When the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). Regarding the symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol, the winning random number initial value related to the special symbol is also specified except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are unique values to those counters. It is updated in the same way as for the value counter.

In the fluctuation counter update process S1205, the values of the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter for determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first variation type counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "187"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, and the first variation. If the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The second variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter are also updated in the same manner as in the case of the first variation type counter, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are unique to those counters. Will be done.

The winning random number counter, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the variation type counters related to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol do not necessarily have to have the above configuration, and at least a part of the counter has another configuration. For example, a configuration in which a constant initial value is updated without using an initial value counter may be used, or a configuration in which a random number generation IC is used without using a program and a value is referred to as necessary may be used. ..

In the game stop determination process S1206, when the fraud detection information is a fraud detection value, it is updated to the game stop value and various information for stopping the game progress is set. On the other hand, if the fraud detection information is not a fraud detection value or is already a game stop value, the game stop determination process S1206 ends without executing each process for stopping the game progress. The fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when the occurrence of various frauds is detected in the fraud detection process S1211. Further, in the determination process S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped depending on whether or not the fraud detection information is the game stop value.

In the control signal output process S1208, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol are related based on the control data stored in the output buffer. A signal for controlling various notification devices such as a normal symbol display device 473 is output. Further, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right approach restricting solenoid 462, a lower approach restricting solenoid 463, an upper approach restricting solenoid 464, and a switching solenoid 465 are used. The control signal is output.

In the switch reading process S1209, the middle start winning switch 441A, 441B, the right starting winning switch 442, the lower winning winning switch 443, the upper winning winning switch 444, the combined operation switch 445, the starting switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447, and the specific The signal states from each of the passage switch 448 and the general winning switches 449A and 449B are read, and changes in the detection state of the game ball by various switches are detected.

Specifically, in the switch read process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read into the input buffer (a part of the area of the RAM) twice at predetermined time intervals, and the signals from the various switches are read. The signal state read for the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as "first signal state") and the signal state read for the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as "second signal state"). , Changes in the detection status of various switches are detected based on the detection status detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "previous detection status"). Then, for each switch, when the previous detection state is the off state, when the first signal state is the on state and the second signal state is the on state, it is determined that the switch is in the on state transition. Then, the detection flag (a part of the area of RAM) corresponding to the type of the switch is set. As described in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, so that the various switches are turned on immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even when started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

In the timer update process S1210, various timers (predetermined areas of RAM) used for variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, control of each game state, fraud monitoring, and the like are updated.

In the fraud detection process S1211, fraudulent acts such as forcibly entering a game ball into various winning devices or forcibly operating various winning devices are detected. Specifically, the right-starting prize device 432, the lower prize winning device 433, and the upper prize winning device 434 are moved to the forced entry allowable posture, and the game ball to the specific passage TA of the lower prize winning device 433 by vibration is applied. Guidance, induction of forced malfunction of right start prize device 432, lower prize prize device 433 and upper prize prize device 434 by radio waves, guidance of game balls to various prize devices by magnetic adsorption, upper middle start prize device 431A , Lower middle start winning device 431B, right starting winning device 432, lower big winning device 433, upper big winning device 434, etc. Detects the occurrence of.

In the winning detection response process S1212, control based on the detection of the game ball by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the middle start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the lower middle starting winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10). The middle start winning counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated. Further, when the right-start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the right-start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Further, when the lower prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower prize winning switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the upper prize winning switch 444 (see FIG. 10) detects the game ball. When the upper prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the above, the grand prize counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) and the second payout counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) are updated.

In the launch control process S1213, the launch-related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the launch solenoid 334 that drives the launch mechanism 333 are updated.

In the input signal monitoring process S1214, an intermediate block is provided with respect to the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930. Whether or not 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed is detected. Further, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the front block 102 (FIG. 2 and FIG. 3) is detected whether or not it is closed.

In the payout state monitoring process S1215, the information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands according to the payout control state are set as necessary. The sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to execute notification according to the type of the payout state command.

In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter, and are output to the payout control board 930, if necessary. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one prize is detected, and is subtracted by 1 each time a prize ball command based on the prize is set. In the payout control board 930, the main control board 920 is awarded each time the control for paying out the number (for example, 3) of the game balls corresponding to the prize is executed (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed). In the situation where the ball command is requested and the prize ball is continuously paid out, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a prize (for example, 13) having a different number of prize balls from the first payout counter, and a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter is issued on the payout control board. When the 930 receives the game, the payout control board 930 executes control to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

In the special symbol-related process S1217, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the lower prize winning device The operation control of the 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 is further executed.

Further, in the special symbol-related process S1217, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the lower prize winning device The operation control of the 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 is further executed.

In the normal symbol-related process S1218, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol and the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol display device 473 related to the normal symbol is executed, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is further executed. ..

In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol, and the special symbol related process S1217. Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol hold display device 477 and the like related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is synthesized. The combined output data is output to each device in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Mode of occurrence of reach effect in probabilistic gaming state>
The mode of occurrence of the reach effect in the probabilistic gaming state and the matters related to them will be described in detail. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a unit game in which the reach display of the decorative symbol is deterministically or selectively generated in the probabilistic game state, and FIG. 14 is for explaining the transition of the internal state in the probabilistic game state. 15 and 16 are explanatory views for explaining the distribution of unit games that deterministically or selectively generate reach display of decorative symbols in a probabilistic game state, and FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram. , It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reach effect in the probable change game state.

First, the transition mode of the gaming state will be described. In the normal gaming state, the game is performed with the aim of allowing the game ball to enter the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning device 431B. Then, the first special symbol lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning device 431B, and if a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the lower It is in a special gaming state in which the grand prize device 433 and the upper prize prize device 434 are operated. In this special gaming state, when a gaming ball enters a specific passage TA (see FIG. 32 (A)) formed inside the lower prize winning device 433, a predetermined number of unit games (this embodiment) are performed after the special gaming state. 100 times), on the other hand, if the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA, the unit is a predetermined number of times (40 times, 60 times or 80 times in this embodiment) after the special game state. It becomes a short-time game state over the game. Further, in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state, the game is performed with the aim of allowing the game ball to enter the right start winning device 432. Then, the second special symbol lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the right start winning device 432, and if a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery before the predetermined number of unit games are completed. , The probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state is reached after the special game state, as in the case of winning the first special symbol lottery. In the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state, when the unit game of a predetermined number of times is completed, the game returns to the normal game state.

Next, the control when a big hit is won by the first special symbol lottery will be described. When a big hit is won by the first special symbol lottery, the mode of the special gaming state is determined based on the value acquired from the big hit symbol random number counter. Specifically, when the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter is "0" to "181", it is in a short-term (6 rounds in this embodiment) special gaming state in which the number of continuous rounds is small, and the value is When it is "182" to "479", it is a long-term (16 rounds in this embodiment) special gaming state in which the number of continuous rounds is large.

Further, as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol lottery, the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol is determined. Specifically, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is identified by an 8-bit value, and is determined by a predetermined operation based on the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter. Each bit of the 8-bit value that identifies the stop symbol is associated with each light emitting unit of the symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol composed of eight light emitting units, and the stop symbol is a bit value. Is displayed by turning on the light emitting unit when it is "1" and turning it off when it is "0".

Further, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 479 is determined based on the values acquired from the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 479, the jackpot symbol related to the decorative symbol is finally confirmed and displayed via the reach display. In addition, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol when the big hit is not won is roughly divided into a pattern in which the lost symbol related to the decorative symbol is finally confirmed and displayed without going through the reach display (hereinafter, "missing"). There are two types: a pattern (also referred to as a "pattern") and a pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as a "reach loss pattern") in which a loss pattern related to a decorative pattern is finally confirmed and displayed, although it passes through a reach display.

After that, the special gaming state is started, and the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 are appropriately operated. In this special game state, when a game ball enters a specific passage TA (see FIG. 32 (A)) formed inside the lower prize winning device 433 and the game ball is detected by the specific passage switch 448, it is special. After the game state, the probabilistic game state is reached over 100 unit games, while when the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA, a predetermined number of times (40 times, 60 times or 80 times in this embodiment) after the special game state. It will be in a time-saving game state over the unit game of (times). In a long-term special game state when the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter is "240" to "479", if the game ball is continuously launched by right-handed hitting, the game ball goes to the specific passage TA. Can be entered, and after the special game state, it becomes a probabilistic game state. On the other hand, in the case of other values, even if the launch of the game ball by right-handed hitting is continued, the game ball cannot enter the specific passage TA, and the game state is shortened after the special game state.

At the time of transition from the special gaming state to the probabilistic gaming state, the pattern of the transition of the internal gaming state that controls the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the probabilistic gaming state after the special gaming state is identified based on the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter. The value (pattern number) to be used is determined. Specifically, as a value for identifying the transition pattern, when the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter is "240" to "359", "1" to "120" are set, respectively, and also. Even in the case of "360" to "479", "1" to "120" are set, respectively. As a result, various transition patterns are evenly selected. In the time-saving game state (the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter is "0" to "239"), a transition pattern different from that in the probabilistic game state is selected.

Next, the control when a big hit is won by the second special symbol lottery will be described. When a big hit is won by the second special symbol lottery, the mode of the special gaming state is determined based on the value acquired from the big hit symbol random number counter. Specifically, when the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter is "0" to "239", it is in a short-term (6 rounds in this embodiment) special gaming state with a small number of continuous rounds, and that value. When is "240" to "479", it is a long-term (16 rounds in this embodiment) special gaming state in which the number of continuous rounds is large.

Further, as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol lottery, the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is determined. The stop symbol related to the second special symbol is identified by an 8-bit value and is determined by a predetermined operation based on the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter, as in the case of the stop symbol related to the first special symbol. Will be done. Further, as in the case of the stop symbol related to the first special symbol, each bit of the 8-bit value for identifying the stop symbol related to the second special symbol relates to the second special symbol composed of eight light emitting units. It is associated with each light emitting unit of the symbol display device 472, and the stop symbol is displayed by turning on the light emitting unit when the bit value is "1" and turning it off when the bit value is "0". ..

Further, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 479 is determined based on the values acquired from the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 479, the jackpot symbol related to the decorative symbol is finally confirmed and displayed via the reach display.

After that, the special gaming state is started, and the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 are appropriately operated. In this special game state, as in the special game state related to the first special symbol, the game ball enters the specific passage TA (see FIG. 32 (A)) formed inside the lower prize winning device 433, and the game is concerned. When the ball is detected by the specific passage switch 448, the probabilistic game state is reached over 100 unit games after the special game state, while when the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA, after the special game state. The time-saving game state is set over 40 times, 60 times, or 80 times of unit games according to the stop symbol of the second special symbol. However, unlike the special game state related to the first special symbol, if the launch of the game ball by right-handed is continued, the game ball may enter the specific passage TA regardless of the value of the jackpot symbol random number counter. It can be done, and after the special game state, it will be in the probable change game state. Transition of the internal gaming state that controls the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the probabilistic gaming state after the special gaming state based on the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter at the time of transition from the special gaming state to the probabilistic gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. The value that identifies the pattern of is determined. Specifically, as a value for identifying the transition pattern, when the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter is "0" to "479", it is set to "1" to "120" four by four. For example, when the values acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter are "0", "120", "240", and "360", the value for identifying the transition pattern is set to "1".

Next, the game in the probabilistic game state will be described. The probabilistic gaming states are internally further subdivided into five types of internal gaming states, and the transition patterns are the probabilistic state A, the probabilistic state B, the probabilistic state C, and the probabilistic state D, as shown in FIG. It is composed of a combination of probabilistic state E and probabilistic state E. Each of the probabilistic state A to the probabilistic state E is common in that in the second special symbol lottery (or the first special symbol lottery), a big hit is drawn with a higher probability than in the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. The selection mode of the effect in the decorative pattern display device 479 is different. In the probabilistic state A, one loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of loss patterns as the fluctuation pattern. Further, in the probability change state B, one reach loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of reach loss patterns as the fluctuation pattern. Further, in the probability change state C, one reach loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of reach loss patterns at a rate of 50%, and one loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of loss patterns at a rate of 50%. Further, in the probabilistic state D, the loss pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern as in the probabilistic state A, and a lottery is drawn as to whether or not the transition to a specific mode display is possible. Further, in the probability change state E, the loss pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern as in the probability change state A, and the process for ending the probability change game state is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the fluctuation of the reach loss pattern is deterministic based on the transition pattern selected from 120 types of transition patterns (stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the main control board 920). Remaining number of unit games to specify the unit games to be generated in (“Number of remaining unit games with fixed reach” in the figure) and remaining to specify the unit games to selectively generate fluctuations in the reach loss pattern by lottery. The number of unit games (“number of remaining unit games for which lottery reach has occurred” in the figure) is set. As a result, as shown in FIG. 14, the internal gaming state in the specific gaming state is the probability change state A (probability change state A) in the unit game from the first unit game to before the unit game in which the reach loss pattern is definitively changed. In the figure, the control according to (abbreviated as "A") is simply executed. Further, in a unit game in which a change in the reach loss pattern is deterministically generated (hereinafter, also referred to as a “determined reach generation unit game”), control according to the probability change state B (simply abbreviated as “B” in the figure) is executed. To. Further, in the unit game after the unit game in which the change of the reach loss pattern is deterministically generated and before the unit game in which the change of the reach loss pattern is selectively generated, the probability change state A is obtained again. Further, in the unit game in which the reach loss pattern is selectively changed (hereinafter, also referred to as “lottery reach generation unit game”), the control according to the probability change state C (simply abbreviated as “C” in the figure) is executed. To. Further, in the unit game from after the unit game in which the reach loss pattern is selectively generated to before the final unit game, control according to the probability change state D (simply abbreviated as “D” in the figure) is executed. Further, in the final unit game, the control according to the probability change state E (simply abbreviated as "E" in the figure) is executed.

Here, an effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 479 in the probabilistic gaming state will be described. In the probabilistic gaming state, on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, as shown in FIG. 17, in addition to the symbol display area 481 for displaying the decorative symbol, the remaining number representing the remaining unit number of games in the probabilistic gaming state. A display area 482 is formed. For example, in the 45th unit game in the probabilistic game state, "55" is displayed as the number of remaining unit games. Further, a reach-related information display area 483 is formed, which represents the type of reach effect and indirectly represents the number of occurrences of the reach effect. Specifically, in the reach-related information display area 483, the left display unit 483L corresponding to the reach effect by the first character having a low jackpot expectation and the right display unit corresponding to the reach effect by the second character having a high jackpot expectation. It is composed of 483R and a central display unit 483M corresponding to the reach effect by the third character whose big hit is confirmed. Until the first reach effect occurs, each of the left display unit 483L, the right display unit 483R, and the center display unit 483M is displayed brightly.

From the first unit game to the unit game before the confirmed reach generation unit game, the jackpot was not won in the second special symbol lottery (or the first special symbol lottery), and the jackpot was not won in the confirmed reach generation unit game. In this case, the first reach display of the decorative symbol is performed in the symbol display area 481, and the lost symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. Along with this reach display, one of the reach effect by the first character and the reach effect by the second character is selected, and the selected reach effect is executed. Further, when the reach effect by the first character is selected, the left display unit 483L is dimmed, while when the reach effect by the second character is selected, the right display unit 483R is dimmed. If the big hit is not won, the reach effect by the third character does not occur.

Further, when the lottery reach generation unit game is reached without winning the big hit and the lottery reach generation unit game is not won the big hit, and the reach generation lottery is won, the symbol display area 481 The second reach display of the decorative symbol is performed, and finally the lost symbol is confirmed and displayed. Along with this reach display, a reach effect by a character different from the character selected in the first reach display is generated, and a right display unit 483R corresponding to the reach effect by the character selected in the current reach display. Alternatively, the left display unit 483L goes dark. On the other hand, in the lottery reach generation unit game, if the reach generation lottery is not won, the reach display of the second decorative symbol does not occur in the symbol display area 481, and the reach effect is not executed. After that, if the final unit game is reached without winning a big hit, and if the big hit is not won even in the final unit game, no further reach display will occur and the reach effect will be executed. Nor.

If a jackpot is won in a unit game from the first unit game to the confirmed reach generation unit game, the first reach display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display area 481, and finally the jackpot symbol is displayed. Confirmed display. In the unit game in which the jackpot is won, a reach effect by the first character, a reach effect by the second character, or a reach effect by the third character is selected. Further, when a big hit is won in the unit game from the fixed reach generation unit game to the lottery reach generation unit game, the second reach display is executed, and finally the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. In the unit game in which the jackpot is won, a reach effect by a character different from the character selected in accordance with the first reach display or a reach effect by a third character is executed. In addition, when a big hit is won in the unit game from the lottery reach generation unit game to the final unit game, if the reach effect is executed in the lottery reach generation unit game in the symbol display area 481, the third On the other hand, if the reach effect is not executed in the lottery reach generation unit game, the second reach display is executed, and finally, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. In the unit game in which the jackpot is won, the reach effect by the third character is always executed in the case of the third reach display, and in the case of the second reach display, the first decoration. A reach effect by a character not selected in the reach display of the symbol or a reach effect by a third character is executed.

Here, the transition pattern will be described. In each probabilistic game state, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in each unit game is determined according to the transition pattern selected from 120 types of transition patterns in which the combination of the definite reach generation unit game and the lottery reach generation unit game is different.

In each transition pattern, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 15 (A), in the fixed reach generation unit game, the number of remaining unit games is in the range of "87" to "46", and "77", It is assigned to unit games other than "66", "64", "50" and "55". The fixed reach generation unit game is frequently assigned to the unit game in which the number of remaining unit games is in the vicinity of "77". Further, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 15B, the number of remaining unit games is in the range of "68" to "13", and the lottery reach generation unit games are "67" and "66". , "64", "62", "60", "59", "56", "55", "50", "45", "44", "36", "34", "33", " It is assigned to unit games other than "23" and "22". Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery (or the first special symbol lottery) in the tenth unit game in which the number of remaining unit games is "90" from the first unit game in which the number of remaining unit games is "99". If the jackpot is not won, the reach display of the decorative symbol is not performed in the symbol display area 481. On the contrary, when the reach display of the decorative symbol occurs in those unit games, it is confirmed that the jackpot has been won. Similarly, from the 91st unit game in which the number of remaining unit games is "9" to the final unit game in which the number of remaining unit games is "0", if the jackpot is not won, the symbol is displayed. The reach display of the decorative symbol is not performed in the area 481, and when the reach display of the decorative symbol occurs in those unit games, it is confirmed that the jackpot has been won. In addition, the 12th and 23rd times in which the number of remaining unit games is "88", "77", "66", "55", "44", "33", "22" and "11" (doublet). In the unit games of the 34th, 34th, 44th, 56th, 67th, 78th, and 88th times, if the jackpot is not won, the reach display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the symbol display area 481. Is not performed, and if the reach display of the decorative symbol occurs in those unit games, it is confirmed that the jackpot has been won.

Further, in each transition pattern, as shown in FIG. 13, at least 10 times (minimum 10 times in this embodiment: pattern 113) of unit games are performed from the fixed reach generation unit game to the lottery reach generation unit game. Intervening. Similarly, at least 10 times (minimum 12 times in this embodiment: patterns 55, 77, 105) of unit games are intervened from after the definite reach generation unit game to the final unit game. Therefore, in the unit game 10 times or less after the unit game in which the reach display of the decorative symbol occurs, if the big hit is not won, the reach display of the decorative symbol is not performed in the symbol display area 481. When the reach display of the decorative symbol occurs in those unit games, it is confirmed that the jackpot has been won. In addition, since the lottery reach generation unit games are not assigned to the 33rd, 44th, 55th, 66th, 77th, and 88th unit games, in those unit games, If the jackpot is not won, the second decorative symbol reach display will not be performed in the symbol display area 481, and the second decorative symbol reach display will occur in those unit games. Is confirmed to have won the jackpot. Although the number of unit games from the start of the probabilistic game state is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, it can be confirmed by a data display device (not shown) provided with the pachinko machine 100.

Further, in each transition pattern, also in a predetermined unit game, for example, in a unit game in which the number of remaining unit games and the number of unit games from the start of the probabilistic game state are "36" representing the name (thumb) of the third character. If the jackpot is not won in the second special symbol lottery (or the first special symbol lottery), the reach display of the decorative symbol is not performed in the symbol display area 481.

Further, in the 120 types of transition patterns, as shown in FIG. 15A, the definite reach generation unit game is frequently assigned to the nearby unit game in which the number of remaining unit games is "77". , The frequency is assigned to decrease as the number of unit games moves away from "77". Therefore, the jackpot expectation in the unit game in which the reach display of the first decorative symbol occurs is low in the unit game in which the number of remaining unit games is in the vicinity of "77", and as the number of remaining unit games moves away from "77". It gets higher. As a result, the expected degree of jackpot when the reach display of the first decorative symbol occurs can be changed for each remaining unit number of games. Further, as shown in FIG. 15B, the lottery reach generation unit game is a nearby unit game in which the number of remaining unit games is “55”, “44” or “33” (particularly “33”). Frequently assigned. Therefore, the jackpot expectation in the unit game in which the reach display of the second decorative symbol is generated is low in the unit game in which the number of remaining unit games is in the vicinity of "55", "44", or "33", and the remaining unit game. The number increases as the number moves from "55" to the smaller side, and increases as it approaches the median value between "55" and "44" ("49") and the median value between "44" and "33" ("39"). It becomes higher, and it becomes higher as the number of remaining unit games moves away from "55" to the larger side. As a result, the degree of expectation of a big hit when the reach display of the second decorative symbol occurs can be changed with a unit game of approximately 5 times as a cycle.

Further, in the 120 types of transition patterns, as shown in FIG. 16, the allocation range of the fixed reach generation unit game and the allocation range of the lottery reach generation unit game partially overlap, and the fixed reach generation unit game and the fixed reach generation unit game The lottery reach generation unit game is a probabilistic game state in which the number of remaining unit games is "87" to "46", except for predetermined unit games (unit games in which the number of remaining unit games corresponds to doublets and characters). It is allocated almost evenly in the predetermined range of the first half of the above, and is allocated substantially evenly in the predetermined range of the latter half of the probabilistic gaming state in which the number of remaining unit games is "46" to "13". However, since the rate of occurrence of the reach display of the decorative symbol in the lottery reach generation unit game is 1/2, the frequency of occurrence of the reach display of the decorative symbol in the latter half is generally the frequency of the reach display of the decorative symbol in the first half. It becomes 1/2. Therefore, in each probabilistic game state, the reach display of the decorative symbol is almost evenly generated in the unit game over a wide range in which the number of remaining unit games is “87” to “13”.

Further, the 120 types of transition patterns are composed of a plurality of combinations of transition patterns in which the number of remaining unit games corresponding to the fixed reach generation unit games is the same and the number of remaining unit games corresponding to the lottery reach generation unit games is different. ing. Therefore, it is not possible to easily estimate the unit game in which the reach display of the second decorative symbol may occur due to the occurrence of the reach display of the decorative symbol in the first time.

In the above pachinko machine 100, a unit game in which the reach display of the decorative symbol is definitely generated is defined in each transition pattern, and even if the jackpot is not won in the probabilistic game state, the reach of the decorative symbol is specified. The display always occurs once. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which even the reach display of the decorative symbol does not occur in the probabilistic game state, as in the case where the occurrence of the reach display is determined by lottery for each unit game, and the game playability in the probabilistic game state. Can be improved.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, in each transition pattern, one unit game in which the reach display of the decorative symbol is deterministically generated and one unit game in which the reach display of the decorative symbol is selectively generated. It is also stipulated that the reach display of decorative symbols should not occur except for those unit games. Therefore, if the reach display of the decorative symbol occurs for the third time in the 100 unit games in the probabilistic game state, it will always be a big hit, but as the game in the probabilistic game state progresses, even if the big hit is not won, it will be decorated. Since the number of reach displays (once or twice) of the symbol always increases, the expectation for the big hit can be amplified as the game progresses. This makes it possible to further improve the playability in the probabilistic gaming state.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the period in which the variation of the loss reach pattern is controlled by the transition pattern is limited to 100 unit games, and the maximum number of times the variation of the loss reach pattern is selected in the period. Is limited to 2 times. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation for a different jackpot depending on the combination of the number of remaining unit games in the probabilistic game state and the number of occurrences of the reach display.

Further, with the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, in each transition pattern, the definite reach generation unit game and the lottery reach generation unit game can be easily set to the desired unit game, and the reach display can be definitely or definitely set in the desired unit game. It can be generated selectively. Further, in all transition patterns, a predetermined unit game, for example, a unit game having the first predetermined number of times or less, a unit game having the last predetermined number of times or less, and a unit in which the number of remaining unit games is a number caused by doublet or a character. By not assigning the confirmed reach generation unit game and the lottery reach generation unit game to the unit game of the game, the fixed reach generation unit game or the lottery reach generation unit game to the predetermined number of times or less, the reach display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the predetermined unit game. It can be easily set so that if it occurs, it will always be a big hit. This makes it possible to further improve the playability in the probabilistic gaming state.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, in all the transition patterns, the fixed reach generation unit games are assigned so as to have a predetermined distribution (see FIG. 15 (A)), and the reach display of the first decorative symbol is displayed. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous when the reach display of the decorative symbol occurs because the expectation of the jackpot when the occurrence of the above occurs is changed. In addition, in all transition patterns, the lottery reach generation unit games are assigned so as to have a predetermined distribution (see FIG. 15 (B)), and the expectation of a big hit when the second decorative symbol reach display occurs. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous when the reach display of the second decorative symbol occurs due to the change of. Thereby, the playability in the probabilistic gaming state can be further improved.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, in all the transition patterns, the reach display of the decorative symbol is a unit game in a predetermined range of the first half of the probabilistic game state (the number of remaining unit games is "87" to "46"). It occurs almost evenly in the unit games in the second half of the probabilistic gaming state (the number of remaining unit games is "46" to "13") that is continuous with the predetermined range in the first half. As such, a fixed reach generation unit game and a lottery reach generation unit game are assigned (see FIG. 16). Therefore, in most of the range of the probabilistic game state (the number of remaining unit games is "87" to "13"), the reach display can be generated as if the reach display was drawn for each unit game. It is possible to maintain the expectation for a big hit. In addition, the probability change game state is due to the change in the expectation of the jackpot between the case where the unit game reach display in the predetermined range of the first half occurs and the case where the reach display occurs in the unit game in the predetermined range in the second half. It is possible to prevent the game in the game from becoming monotonous. Thereby, the playability in the probabilistic gaming state can be further improved.

Further, there is a set of transition patterns in which the predetermined number of remaining unit games corresponding to the fixed reach generation unit games is the same, and the number of remaining unit games corresponding to the lottery reach generation unit games is different. Multiple sets of patterns are set. Therefore, it is not possible to easily estimate the unit game in which the reach display of the second decorative symbol may occur based on the unit game in which the reach display of the first decorative symbol occurs, and the reach display is always displayed. You can continue the game while expecting the occurrence of. This makes it possible to further improve the playability in the probabilistic gaming state.

<Display mode of special design>
The stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, their display modes, and matters related thereto will be described in detail. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol-related process S1217 in the main control interrupt process. Further, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol change start process S1303 in the special symbol related process S1217, and FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol generation process S1404 in the special symbol change start process S1303.

The stop symbol identification value for identifying the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the stop symbol of the second special symbol is a predetermined operation based on the symbol identification value determined according to the jackpot symbol random number value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter. If the operation result is not in the predetermined value range, it will be set to the generated value, while if the operation result is in the predetermined value range, the generated value will be set. It is set to a predetermined value associated with the value. The control for determining the stop symbol identification value based on the acquired value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter is the special symbol variation start process S1303 (see FIGS. 18 and 19) of the special symbol related process S1217 (see FIGS. 12 and 18). ), The winning determination process S1403 (see FIG. 19) and the stop symbol generation process S1404 (see FIGS. 19 and 20).

In the special symbol-related process S1217, as shown in FIG. 18, in addition to the special symbol variation start process S1303, the upper middle start winning device 431A (see FIG. 7) and the lower middle starting winning device 431B (see FIG. 7). ), The start winning process S1301 that executes the control related to the first special symbol lottery accompanying the entry of the game ball and the second special symbol lottery accompanying the entry of the game ball into the right start winning device 432 (see FIG. 7). Is also done.

Further, the special symbol-related state identification value determination process S1302 is executed, and any of the specific processes constituting the special symbol-related process S1217 is executed by using the special symbol-related state identification value corresponding to the ongoing gaming state. Is selected.

Further, the special symbol variation display process S1304 that executes the control related to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the control related to the definite display of the stop symbol related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are performed. The special symbol confirmation display process S1305 to be executed is also executed. Further, the large prize device operation start process S1306 to the large prize device operation stop process S1311 for controlling the operation of the lower prize winner device 433 (see FIG. 7) and the upper prize winner device 434 (see FIG. 7) in the special gaming state are also performed. .. Further, in the special symbol change start process S1303, as shown in FIG. 19, in addition to the winning determination process S1403 and the stop symbol generation process S1404, for shifting to the next change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special symbol change pre-setting process S1401 for executing control and the special symbol hold data progressive process S1402 for executing control for changing the hold state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also executed.

Further, the special symbol change start setting process S1405 for executing the control for starting the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed. In the special symbol change start setting process S1405, the change pattern is selected according to the game state and the above-mentioned transition pattern. The main control board 920 controls the display contents of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 according to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern, and the control command corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the sub control board 940. Send. In the decorative symbol display device 479, the variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display in the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 under the control of the sub control board 940.

Here, a method of generating a stop symbol identification value from the jackpot symbol random number value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter will be specifically described. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing parameters for associating a jackpot symbol random value with a symbol identification value, and FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing a correlation between the jackpot symbol random value and a symbol identification value and a mode of a special gaming state. Is. Further, FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation for generating a stop symbol identification value from the symbol identification value, and FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram of the stop symbol identification value when the stop symbol identification value is within a predetermined value range. It is explanatory drawing which shows the substitution, and FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram which shows the correlation between a symbol identification value, a stop symbol identification value, and a light emission pattern.

The main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) includes a CPU (not shown) whose basic calculation unit is 8 bits, and can perform operations in 8-bit units or 16-bit units. The jackpot symbol random value is stored in a 16-bit area of the RAM (not shown) of the main control board 920, and the range of possible values is a value from "0" to "479", and the first special It is common to the symbol and the second special symbol.

In the winning determination process S1403, when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the big hit symbol random value is less than the first symbol ratio "172" (the first value in the left column of FIG. 21 (A)). If the jackpot symbol random value is less than the first symbol ratio, the jackpot symbol random value is further set to the first number of symbols "10" (the first in the right column of FIG. 21 (A)). It is determined whether or not it is less than the first value). When the jackpot symbol random value is less than the first number of symbols, the jackpot symbol random value is set as the symbol identification value. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol random value is less than the first symbol ratio, but the jackpot symbol random value is not less than the first symbol number, the first symbol number is repeatedly decremented from the jackpot symbol random value, and the first symbol is used. The value when it becomes less than the number is set as the symbol identification value. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22, when the jackpot symbol random value is "0" to "171", the values of "0" to "9" are repeated in order from the smallest jackpot symbol random value. Assigned.

If the jackpot symbol random value is not less than the first symbol ratio, the value corresponding to the first symbol ratio is subtracted from the jackpot symbol random value, and the value after the subtraction is the second symbol ratio "10". It is determined whether or not it is less than (the second value in the left column of FIG. 21 (A)), and if the jackpot symbol random value is less than the second symbol ratio, the value after the subtraction is the second. A value obtained by adding the number of symbols "10" of 1 is set as a symbol identification value. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22, when the jackpot symbol random value is "172" to "181", the symbol identification value is set to "10" to "19" in order from the smallest jackpot symbol random value. Value is assigned.

If the jackpot symbol random value after the value corresponding to the first symbol ratio is subtracted is not less than the second symbol ratio, the value corresponding to the second symbol ratio is further increased from the jackpot symbol random value. The value after subtraction (the value obtained by subtracting the first symbol ratio and the second symbol ratio from the jackpot symbol random value) is the third symbol ratio "58" (the first in the left column of FIG. 21 (A)). It is determined whether or not it is less than the third value). When the value after the subtraction is less than the third symbol ratio, the value after the subtraction is less than the third number of symbols "10" (the third value in the right column of FIG. 21 (A)). If it is less than the number of the third symbol, the value obtained by adding the total value "20" of the number of the first symbol and the number of the second symbols to the value after the subtraction is the symbol identification. Set as a value. On the other hand, when the value after the subtraction is less than the third symbol ratio but not less than the number of the third symbols, the number of the third symbols is repeatedly decremented from the value after the subtraction, and the number is less than the third symbol number. The value obtained by adding the total value "20" of the first number of symbols and the second number of symbols to the value in the case of becomes is set as the symbol identification value. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22, when the jackpot symbol random value is "182" to "231", the symbol identification value is "20" to "29" in order from the smallest jackpot symbol random value. Is repeatedly assigned.

If the jackpot symbol random value after subtracting the value corresponding to the first symbol ratio and the value corresponding to the second symbol ratio is not less than the third symbol ratio, the jackpot symbol random value is further increased. The value corresponding to the third symbol ratio is subtracted, and the value after the subtraction (value obtained by subtracting the first symbol ratio, the second symbol ratio, and the third symbol ratio from the jackpot symbol random value) is the fourth. It is determined whether or not the symbol ratio is less than "240" (fourth value in the left column of FIG. 21 (A)). If the value after the subtraction is less than the fourth symbol ratio, the value after the subtraction is the fourth symbol number "120" (the fourth value in the right column of FIG. 21 (A)). It is determined whether or not it is less than, and if it is less than the fourth number of symbols, the total value of the first number of symbols, the second number of symbols, and the third number of symbols "30" is added to the value after the subtraction. Is added as a symbol identification value. On the other hand, when the value after the subtraction is not less than the fourth symbol number "120", the fourth symbol number is further subtracted from the subtracted value, and the first symbol number and the second symbol are added to the subtracted value. The value obtained by adding the total value "30" of the number of symbols and the number of third symbols is set as the symbol identification value. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22, when the jackpot symbol random value is "240" to "479", the symbol identification value is "30" to "149" in order from the smallest jackpot symbol random value. Is repeatedly assigned.

Further, in the winning determination process S1403, when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery based on the symbol ratio and the number of symbols shown in FIG. 21 (B). The symbol identification value is derived in the same manner as in the case of. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol random value is "0" to "181", the value of "0" to "119" is repeatedly assigned to the symbol identification value in order from the smallest jackpot symbol random value. When the jackpot symbol random value is "182" to "479", the value of "120" to "239" is repeatedly assigned to the symbol identification value in order from the smallest jackpot symbol random value. For example, when the jackpot symbol random value is "0" or "120", the symbol identification value is "0", and when the jackpot symbol random value is "61" or "181", the symbol identification value is "". 61 ”, and when the jackpot symbol random value is“ 119 ”, the symbol identification value is“ 119 ”. When the jackpot symbol random value is "182", "302" or "422", the symbol identification value is "120" and the jackpot symbol random value is "239", "359" or "479". In the case, the symbol identification value is "177", and when the jackpot symbol random value is "301" or "421", the symbol identification value is "239".

The symbol identification value is stored in an 8-bit area of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the range of possible values is "0" to "149" for the first special symbol and the second. It is "0" to "239" for a special symbol. Further, the symbol identification value is used to determine the mode of the special gaming state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22, when the symbol identification value related to the first special symbol is "0" to "9", the short-term number of continuous rounds is small (6 rounds in this embodiment). (Short-term A in the figure), and after the special gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is set for a predetermined number of times (40 times in this embodiment) of unit games. Further, when the symbol identification value related to the first special symbol is "10" to "19", it is a short-term special gaming state (short-term B in the figure) with a small number of continuous rounds (6 rounds in this embodiment). After the special game state, the time-saving game state is set for a predetermined number of times (60 times in this embodiment) of unit games. Further, when the symbol identification value related to the first special symbol is "20" to "29", it is a long-term special gaming state (long-term A in the figure) with a large number of continuous rounds (16 rounds in this embodiment). After the special game state, the time-saving game state is set for a predetermined number of times (80 times in this embodiment) of unit games. Further, when the symbol identification value related to the first special symbol is "30" to "149", it is a long-term special gaming state (long-term B in the figure) with a large number of continuous rounds (16 rounds in this embodiment). After the special game state, the probabilistic game state is set for a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) of unit games. Although not shown, when the symbol identification value related to the second special symbol is "0" to "119", the game is in a short-term (6 rounds in this embodiment) special game state in which the number of continuous rounds is small. After the state, the probabilistic game state is set over a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) of the unit game. Further, when the symbol identification value related to the second special symbol is "120" to "239", it is in a long-term (16 rounds in this embodiment) special gaming state in which the number of continuous rounds is large, and after the special gaming state, it is in a special gaming state. The probabilistic game state is set over a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) of unit games. In addition, after the unit game of a predetermined number of times is completed in various time-saving game states and various probabilistic game states, the normal game state is set.

Further, the symbol identification value is also used to identify the transition pattern of the internal gaming state for controlling the variation pattern in the probabilistic gaming state and the time-saving gaming state after the special gaming state, and is particularly in the probabilistic gaming state. As described above, different patterns of transition of the internal gaming state are assigned to different symbol identification values.

Next, an exclusive OR operation is executed between the symbol identification value and the value obtained by executing the zero-filled left bit shift operation four times for the same value as the symbol identification value, and the converted value of the symbol identification value is generated. (Conversion value generation process S1501: see FIG. 20). In this conversion value, the value of the lower 4 bits is the same as the value of the lower 4 bits of the original symbol identification value, and the value of the upper 4 bits changes based on the value of the lower 4 bits of the original symbol identification value. , The same conversion value is not generated from different symbol identification values.

Next, a reference value is generated by adding the correction value “2 (02H)” to the converted value (reference value generation process S1502: see FIG. 20). In the 8-bit addition operation, when "1 (01H)" is added to "FFH", it becomes "00H". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 24, "FEH" and "FFH" are used. When the correction values are added, the values "00H" and "01H", which are different from the normal addition results, are taken, respectively.

Next, when it is determined whether or not the reference value is "5 (05H)" or less (determination process S1503: see FIG. 20), and the reference value is "5 (05H)" or less (S1503: Y). In, the converted value is replaced with a different replacement value associated with the six types of reference values as shown in FIG. 24 (conversion value replacement process S1504: see FIG. 20). If the reference value is not "5 (05H)" or less (S1503: N), the converted value is not replaced with another value (skip of the converted value replacement process S1504).

Finally, when the converted value is "00H" to "03H" and "FEH" and "FFH", the replacement value corresponding to that value is set as the stop symbol identification value, and the converted value is another value. In some cases, the converted value itself is set as the stop symbol identification value (stop symbol setting process S1505: see FIG. 20). As a result, as shown in FIG. 25, even if the value is in the range of having continuity in the symbol identification value, it becomes a discrete value having no continuity in the stopped symbol identification value.

Here, a display mode of the stop symbol based on the stop symbol identification value in the special symbol display device 471 according to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 according to the second special symbol will be described.

Each of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol has eight light emitting units, and each of the light emitting units corresponds to each bit in the stop symbol identification value. As shown in FIG. 25, when the value of the bit constituting the stop symbol identification value is "1", it lights up (black circle of the light emission pattern in FIG. 25) and the value is ". If it is "0", the light is turned off (white circles in the light emission pattern in FIG. 25).

The most discriminating aspect in which all light emitting parts are turned on as when the converted value is "FFH", and the most discriminating mode in which all light emitting parts are turned off when the converted value is "00H". The high aspect is set to be used when checking the lighting and extinguishing of the pachinko machine 100 when the power is turned on, and not to be used for displaying the stop symbol related to the big hit.

When the conversion values are "01H" and "02H", the two light emitting parts at the right end are alternately lit to indicate that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, which is a big hit. It is set not to be used to display the stop symbol related to. Further, the mode in which the two light emitting units at the right end are lit as in the case where the conversion value is "03H" is used when the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. It is set not to be used to display the stop symbol related to the big hit. As a result, if the big hit is not won in the 1st special symbol lottery or the 2nd special symbol lottery, the display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol during change and the display of the loss are displayed only in the two light emitting parts at the right end. Can be done by.

In the case of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, in the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the relationship with the internal gaming state (transition pattern) of the probabilistic gaming state is The internal gaming state of the probabilistic gaming state is notified not by the high symbol identification value but by the light emitting mode based on the stop symbol identification value whose relevance is diluted. Therefore, depending on the player, the internal gaming state in the probabilistic gaming state, that is, the reach display by the decorative symbol, is displayed from the notification mode by the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol. It becomes more difficult to infer which transition pattern is selected from the plurality of transition patterns that control the generation mode, as compared with the case where the light emission mode is determined based on the symbol identification value. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to infer how many unit games the fixed reach generation unit game and the lottery reach generation unit game correspond to in the probabilistic game state, and the game performance in the probabilistic game state is dramatically improved. do.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, in the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the relationship with the internal gaming state (number of continuations) of the time-saving gaming state. The internal gaming state of the probabilistic gaming state is notified by the light emitting mode based on the stop symbol identification value in which the relevance is diluted instead of the symbol identification value having a high value. Therefore, depending on the player, how many unit games the time-saving gaming state continues from the notification mode by the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol. It becomes more difficult to infer the light emission mode as compared with the case where the light emission mode is determined based on the symbol identification value. As a result, the playability in the time-saving gaming state is dramatically improved.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, in the generation of the stop symbol identification value, except for a part (conversion values are "00H", "01H", "02H", "03H", "FEH" and "FFH". (Except when), since it is generated only by a predetermined operation based on the symbol identification value, the program capacity is determined based only on the table showing the correspondence between the symbol identification value and the stopped symbol identification value. Various stop symbol identification values can be easily generated without significantly increasing the data capacity.

Further, in the above pachinko machine 100, the operation used to generate the converted value of the symbol identification value is a combination of the zero-filled left bit shift operation which is a logical operation and the exclusive OR operation which is a logical operation. In addition, it is possible to perform operations at a higher speed than when it includes four rules operations. As a result, even if an operation for generating a stop symbol identification value is performed before the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is possible to suppress the delay in the start of the variation.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the conversion value of the symbol identification value is a value that is not desired to be adopted as the stop symbol identification value (“00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, “FEH” and “FEH”. In the case of "FFH"), those values can be easily excluded by substituting with predetermined substitution values based on the table. Since only a small number of values that are not desired to be adopted as the stop symbol identification value are replaced based on the table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data capacity required for storing the table.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the values that are not desired to be adopted as the stop symbol identification values are distributed in two separated ranges (“00H” to “03H” and “FEH” to “FFH”). Since the separated range is a continuous range including the minimum value "00H" and a continuous range including the maximum value "FFH", the two separated ranges are continuously combined by adding or subtracting a predetermined correction value. Can be integrated into the range. Therefore, it is possible to collectively determine whether or not to replace the converted value of the symbol identification value with a predetermined replacement value, and the control process is simplified. In the above pachinko machine 100, the number of values included in the range on the maximum value side (“FEH” to “FFH”) and the same number of values “2” are added to the conversion value to separate the two. The ranges (“00H” to “03H” and “FEH” to “FFH”) are integrated into one contiguous range (“00H” to “05H”) containing the minimum value.

<Advance production and small hit in the probabilistic game state>
The pachinko machine 100 is provided with the functions of advance effect and small hit, and after explaining the configuration of the advance effect, the configuration of the small hit will be described.

The preceding effect is an effect that suggests the granting of benefits in a unit game that has not yet been started. The preceding effect is an effect on the visual sense by displaying the decorative pattern display device 479, etc., an effect on the tactile sense by vibration of the launch operation device 250 and the input operation device 260, and an audio output from the sound device 281,282. It is performed by one or more devices that stimulate the sensation that the player can perceive the situation, such as directing to the auditory sense. In the following, a case where the preceding effect is executed by using the effect for the visual sense by the display will be described, but instead of the preceding effect by the display or in addition to the preceding effect by the display, for other senses. The privilege may be suggested to the player by the preceding effect of operating the device.

In the preceding production, as the granting of the privilege suggested to the player, a big hit winning, a small hit winning described later, or the occurrence of a probabilistic gaming state, which is given a gaming state advantageous to the player, is exemplified. , This kind of privilege is a substantial privilege that leads to the granting of the prize ball as a game value. In addition, the benefits given to the player include benefits by special effects such as reach production that expects a big hit and the appearance of a specific character, and this kind of privilege is a formal privilege that does not give the game value. .. Even if the lottery result of the unit game is lost as a result of the reach production, the player is expected to clear some of the multiple stages leading to the big hit winning and approach the winning compared to the unit game without the reach production. It is possible to give a privilege that makes you feel.

The preceding effect is executed by determining the content of the unit game whose execution has not been started yet, and by displaying or outputting the voice corresponding to the content. For example, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the execution of the preceding effect is controlled by controlling the execution setting of the display effect on the main control board 920.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning process S1301 in the special symbol-related process S1217 (see FIG. 18), and FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the hold information output setting process S1707 in the start winning process S1301.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the start winning process S1301, it is first determined whether or not there is a start winning of the first special symbol (S1601), and if there is a starting winning of the first special symbol (S1601: Y). The prize ball setting process S1602 for updating the value of the payout counter for paying out the prize balls and the prize information output setting process S1603 for outputting to an external device which start winning device has won a prize are executed.

After the processing of S1603, it is determined whether or not the current number of hold of the unit game is less than 4 and the right of the maximum number of unit games is held (S1604), and the number of hold of the right is determined. If it is less than the maximum number (S1604: Y), the information on the current number of holds stored in the first symbol hold count storage unit (predetermined area of RAM) (for example, "3") is held for one time. The information is updated to the number of times added (for example, "4") (S1605).

After the process of S1605, the random number acquisition process S1606 and the hold information output setting process S1607 are performed. In the random number acquisition process S1606, the values of the winning random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the stop pattern random number related to the first special symbol are stored in the first symbol hold information storage unit (predetermined area of RAM) in correspondence with the updated information on the number of hold times. Store in. In the hold information output setting process S1607, the setting for transmitting the hold information including the increase in the right of the unit game to the sub control board 940 is executed on the sub control board 940, and the process corresponding to the above-mentioned preceding effect is also performed. The hold information set in the hold information output setting process S1607 is transmitted to the sub-control board 940 by the external information output process S1221 (see FIG. 12) performed thereafter.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that there is no start winning of the first special symbol (S1601: N), the process of S1602 to S1607 is skipped and the process is transferred to S1701. Further, if the number of hold of the unit game is "4" in the process of S1604 (S1604: N), the process shifts to S1701 without executing the process of updating the hold number or acquiring the random number.

In the processes of S1701 to S1707, the process related to the start prize related to the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the process of the start prize related to the first special symbol (S1601 to S1607) described above. The content of the process is the same as the process related to the first special symbol described above. In the hold information output setting process S1707 as a part of the process related to the second special symbol, a process corresponding to the preceding effect executed during the probabilistic game state is executed, and for details of this process, refer to FIG. 27. I will explain. Since the hold information output setting process S1607 related to the first special symbol is configured by the same process as the hold information output setting process S1707 related to the second special symbol, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the hold information output setting process S1707, as shown in FIG. 27, first, it is determined whether or not the right of the unit game based on the current start winning is held (S1801). This determination determines whether the situation is in the probabilistic game state and waiting for the establishment of the unit game right, or the situation in which the unit game is being executed and the unit game right is suspended. It is done.

When the unit game is executed immediately without the right of the unit game being reserved (S1801: N), the normal hold command is set (S1802), and the hold information output setting process S1707 is terminated. In the situation where the start prize is generated in the start prize process S1301 in which the hold information output setting process S1707 is executed this time, the unit game is started immediately in the probability fluctuation state, so that the privilege in the unit game is given. Since it is not necessary to suggest by the preceding effect, the hold information output setting process S1707 is terminated without going through the processing after S1805 for executing the preceding effect. It should be noted that the process of S1801 may be omitted, and the process of S1803 or later may be executed even in a situation where the unit game based on the start winning is immediately executed. In this case, the program can be simplified. ..

When the right of the unit game is reserved (S1801: N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot generation information is stored in the jackpot information storage unit (a predetermined area of the RAM) (S1803).

The jackpot information storage unit is an area for confirming the presence / absence of information on the occurrence of jackpots, and is composed of, for example, a 1-bit flag (big hit storage flag). The jackpot memory flag is turned on when there is a unit game in which the value of the winning random number counter corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the unit game that is being executed and the unit game that has already been suspended and has not been executed. A flag is exemplified in which the jackpot occurrence information is stored, and when the unit game corresponding to the jackpot winning is completed, the flag is turned off and the jackpot occurrence information is deleted.

In the process of S1803, when the jackpot occurrence information is stored (S1803: Y), the normal hold command is set (S1802), and the hold information output setting process S1707 ends. If the information on the occurrence of the jackpot is stored, the gaming state may shift from the probabilistic gaming state to the special gaming state, and the probabilistic gaming state may be started by the new transition pattern selected in the jackpot. If a unit game with a change in the game state is being executed, or if the right to the unit game is already reserved, the preceding effect of the unit game established after that may differ from the actual content of the unit game. There is sex. Therefore, the hold information output setting process S1707 is terminated without going through each process after S1805 for executing the preceding effect.

In the process of S1803, if the jackpot generation information is not stored (S1803: N), it is determined whether the number of remaining unit games is larger than "0" (S1804), and if the number of remaining unit games is "0" (S1803: N). S1804: N), the normal hold command is set (S1802), and the hold information output setting process S1707 ends. This is because if the number of remaining unit games is "0", the game state is not in the probabilistic game state, and each process for executing the preceding effect in the probabilistic game state is not necessary. Even when the number of remaining unit games is "0" (S1804: N), the processing after S1805 may be executed. In this case, a game state different from the probabilistic game state (for example, normal). Even in the game state), it is possible to execute a preliminary effect for winning a big hit or generating a reach.

When it is determined in the process of S1804 that the number of remaining unit games is larger than "0" (S1804: Y), the current number of remaining unit games is extracted from the unit game number storage unit (predetermined area of RAM). The target number of times is calculated by subtracting the current number of held times from the remaining unit number of games, and information corresponding to the target number of times (for example, the target number of times itself) is stored in the target number storage unit (predetermined area of RAM) (S1805). ).

After the processing of S1805, it is determined whether the second special symbol is in the variable display (S1806: Y), and if it is not in the variable display, it corresponds to "1 time" for the target number stored in the target number storage unit. The number of times to be added is set as the new target number of times, and the information corresponding to the target number of times is stored in the target number of times storage unit.

Here, in the pachinko machine 100, in the special symbol confirmation display process S1305 (see FIG. 18) for stopping the variation display, the remaining unit game number in the unit game number storage unit is updated, and the variation display is continuously executed. In the situation where the number of targets is stored, the number of targets stored in the target number storage unit and the actual number of remaining unit games match. On the other hand, in the situation where the execution of the unit game is waiting (for example, the fixed stop of the variable display or the special game state), the unit game to be executed first among the reserved unit games (that is, the unit game is held first). Although the unit game) corresponds to the first unit game in the number of remaining unit games, if the number of holdings is subtracted as the target number in the process of S1805, a deviation of one time occurs between the target number and the number of remaining unit games. obtain.

The processing of S1806 and S1807 is a processing for correcting the number of remaining unit games of the unit game for which the start winning is established, which is the target of the preceding effect, thereby accurately counting the target number of times and one remaining unit. Only the number of games is stored in the unit game number storage unit, and the target number corresponding to the number of holds and the number of remaining unit games being executed can be used in the control of the main control board 920. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance of a shift in control between the stored remaining unit games even for a moment. Therefore, timer interrupt processing and main processing coexist, and it is easy to debug the program in each situation where processing at the time of power failure occurs, and accurate processing is realized by using a storage unit with a small capacity. be able to.

It should be noted that the update of the number of remaining unit games in the unit game number storage unit does not necessarily have to be the timing at which the variable display ends, but may be the timing at which the variable display starts, and the game related to the unit game ends (for example,). It may be the timing at which the fixed stop process ends, or the timing at which the special gaming state based on the jackpot ends in the case of a unit game that generates a jackpot). In addition, it is possible to simplify program debugging and realize accurate processing using a storage unit having a small capacity. In addition, in the unit game number storage unit, the remaining unit number based on the running unit game and the remaining unit based on the remaining number when the running unit game and the number of reserved rights are consumed. Even if the number of games is stored separately, the target number of times can be derived.

In the process from S1901, the target number of times stored in the target number of times storage unit is used, the content of the unit game for which the right is generated is confirmed, and the hold information corresponding to the content is set. First, in the process of S1901, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning random number counter acquired by the occurrence of the start winning is the winning value (hereinafter referred to as the jackpot winning value) that wins the jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the jackpot winning value), and the jackpot winning. If it is a value (S1901: Y), the jackpot storage flag is turned on to store the jackpot occurrence information in the jackpot information storage unit (S1902), and a hold command with the jackpot winning information added is set (S1903). ), Ends the hold information output setting process S1707.

Here, the hold command includes information corresponding to the updated number of holds and information that can determine whether the hold is a first special symbol, a second special symbol, or a normal symbol as a symbol type. Further, as information necessary for executing the preceding effect, information corresponding to the presence / absence of a big hit winning and the presence / absence of a reach is added, and the information output to the sub-control board 940 is exemplified. When the sub-control board 940 receives the hold command, the sub-control board 940 executes the preceding effect by the display mode and the output of the sound according to the content thereof, and suggests to the player that a big hit is won or a reach is generated. In addition, when a player has a right to a unit game such as a big hit or a reach, it is not necessary to suggest the right to the player with a 100% probability, and it is less than 100% in advance. It may be configured to execute the preceding effect at a predetermined ratio and generate a big hit even if the preceding effect is not executed, and there are benefits such as unit games that did not win the big hit and unit games that do not generate reach. Even in the unit game in which the grant of the above is not established, the preceding effect is executed in the same manner as the preceding effect, and even if the preceding effect is executed, the grant of the privilege is not confirmed, and the grant is expected. May be.

In the process of S1901 when it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter acquired by the occurrence of the start winning is not the jackpot winning value (S1901: N), the unit game is a game in which the jackpot is not won, and the game It is determined whether or not there is a loss reach in which the reach effect is fixedly stopped by the loss symbol (S1904). In the determination of the occurrence of this loss reach, the target number of times stored in the target number of times storage unit, the value (pattern number) for identifying the transition pattern of the internal gaming state, and the transition pattern of the state corresponding to the pattern number (predetermined ROM). (Area) and, it is determined whether reach occurs in the variable display in the unit game of the target number of times.

If it is determined in the process of S1904 that a loss reach occurs (S1904: Y), a hold command to which the loss reach occurrence information corresponding to the reach occurrence is added is set (S1905). On the other hand, in the process of S1904, when it is determined that the loss reach does not occur (S1904: N), the normal hold command is set (S1906).

After the processing of S1905 or S1906 is executed, it is determined whether the gaming state in the unit game one time before the target number of times is the state C (probability change state C) (S1907), and it is determined to be the probability change state C. (S1907: Y), after adding advantageous game start information to the hold command (S1908), the hold information output setting process S1707 ends. In the pachinko machine 100, the probabilistic state D, which is started after the probabilistic state C, is set to a gaming state in which it is easier to give a privilege by a small hit that is advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the advantageous gaming state is set. The start of the game is suggested to the player by the preceding effect through the sub-control board 940. The details of the game state regarding the small hit will be described later.

In the process of S1907, when it is determined that the gaming state one time before the target number of times is not the probabilistic state C (S1907), it is determined whether the gaming state of the target number of times is the state D (probability change state D) (S1909). If it is the probability change state D (S1909: Y), after adding the advantageous game execution information to the hold command (S1910), the hold information output setting process S1707 ends. In the unit game of the probability change state D, the privilege by the small hit is easily given to the player, and the grant of the privilege is suggested to the player by the preceding effect through the sub-control board 940.

In the process of S1909, when it is determined that the gaming state of the target number of times is not the state D (S1909: N), it is determined whether the gaming state of the unit game executed 9 times after the target number of times is the probability change state C (S1909: N). S1911) If the probability change state is C (S1911: Y), the advantageous game approach information is added to the hold command (S1912), and then the hold information output setting process S1707 ends. In the situation where the game state executed after a certain number of times with respect to the target number of times (9 times in the present embodiment) is the probability change state C, an advantageous game state in which the privilege due to the small hit is easily given to the player. Can be started with the remaining 10 times, so that the situation in which the privilege is approaching due to the advantageous gaming state is suggested to the player by the preceding effect through the sub-control board 940.

In the process of S1911, when it is determined that the game state of the unit game executed 9 times after the target number of times is not the state C (S1911: N), information for generating a preceding effect for the hold command is provided. The hold information output setting process S1707 is terminated without being added.

Next, the small hit will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, a small hit is set in addition to the above-mentioned big hit as a lottery result of the unit game related to the second special symbol. If a small hit is won, the player is given a different privilege than if the big hit is won. As one of the types of special gaming states that occur when a big hit is won, a special gaming state in which a privilege of the same size as the small hit is given may be set.

In the pachinko machine 100, when a game ball that has entered the right-start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right-start winning switch 442, a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. The regulation solenoid 463 is activated. If the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol acquired based on the start winning is a value that wins a predetermined small hit (hereinafter referred to as a small hit winning value), the small hit is won. .. The small hit winning value is set to a value different from the big hit winning value, and it is set that the big hit and the small hit are not established at the same time in one start winning. In the unit game in which the small hit is won, the predetermined small hit symbol is the special symbol display device 471,472 among the symbols different from the big hit symbol (the lost symbol displayed when the big hit is not won). It is set as a stop symbol in.

If a small hit is won, the lower entry control solenoid 463 is activated, and the lower entry winning device 433 is in the entry allowable posture. The entry allowance posture is when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are detected by the big prize switch 443 in one small hit winning, or a predetermined maximum entry allowance time (for example, 3 seconds). It ends when the time has passed, and then returns to the no-entry posture. During the period in which this permissible approach posture continues, the game state related to the small hit (small hit game state) is supported, and the small hit game state starts when the stop symbol corresponding to the winning of the small hit is displayed. Then, after the lower prize winning device 433 returns to the no-entry posture, the small hit game state ends. As for the small hit game state, as in the special game state corresponding to the big hit, the execution of the variable display is waited for, and after the small hit game state, the variable display related to the next unit game is performed.

The control of the small hit game state is performed in the special symbol related process S1217 (see FIG. 18), and it is determined in the special symbol confirmation display process S1305 whether or not the small hit is won. If a small hit is won, each process of the large prize device operation start process S1306 to the large prize device operation stop process S1311 is performed, and the lower large prize device 433 is in an entry prohibited posture for a period corresponding to the above time. Will be. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to make the variable display stand by during the small hit game state, and the variable display of the next unit game may be started during the small hit game state.

Small hits differ in that they do not trigger a change in the gaming state compared to winning a big hit. If a small hit is won, the game proceeds according to the game state determined in the lottery before the previous time. For example, in the normal game state, the normal game state continues after the small hit game state, and in the probabilistic game state, one unit game is executed by the end of the small hit game state, and the remaining unit game. The number is reduced by one.

Here, the details of the contents of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram comparing the specifications of the game in each gaming state. In FIG. 28, the time-saving gaming state is omitted.

When the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on and the game is started, as shown in FIG. 28, first, the game is started from the normal game state. In the normal game state, the right of the unit game is generated by the start winning, and the game is executed in anticipation of winning a big hit. When the right to the unit game is generated by the start prize, the special symbol (specifically, the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner and stopped, and the unit game related to the special symbol is won a big hit lottery. Then, the game state shifts to the special game state. Whether or not the jackpot lottery is won is determined by the winning determination process S1403 (see FIG. 19) constituting the special symbol-related process S1217 (see FIG. 12) that controls the unit game related to the special symbol.

In the special gaming state, for example, the operation of the large prize device (specifically, the lower prize device 433 and the upper prize device 434) for about 30 seconds is performed a predetermined number of times (specifically, 6 times or 16 times). When it is executed and the transition condition (V prize) to the probabilistic gaming state is satisfied during the special gaming state, it shifts to the probabilistic gaming state after that, and if the transition condition is not satisfied, it is the normal gaming state via the time-saving gaming state. Move to. Whether or not a V prize has occurred is executed as a part of the special symbol-related process S1217 (see FIG. 12), and a condition (predetermined specification) in which the V prize occurs and the probabilistic gaming state is started. When (corresponding to the game start condition) is satisfied, information corresponding to the probabilistic game state is stored in the game state storage unit (predetermined area of RAM) that stores the game state, and the special symbol is related according to the information. The lottery conditions are set, and the number of remaining unit games corresponding to the number of executions of the probabilistic game state is set. Further, the conditions of the normal symbol lottery in the normal symbol-related process S1218 (see FIG. 12) and the transition time of the right start winning device 432 to the approach allowable posture are also controlled according to the information stored in the game state storage unit. ..

In the probabilistic game state, the right of the unit game is generated by the start prize (mainly the start prize related to the second special symbol) and the game is executed. In this probabilistic gaming state, a big hit and a small hit are generated, and the small hits are continuously generated after the number of remaining unit games is set in advance according to the transition pattern. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs in the probabilistic gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state ends and shifts to the special gaming state, and the probabilistic change is performed again according to the transition pattern according to the value of the jackpot symbol random number counter acquired at the time of winning the jackpot. The game state is started. In the probabilistic game state, one start prize is generated, the remaining unit game number is subtracted by 1 each time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and then confirmed and stopped, and a big hit until the remaining unit game number becomes "0". If you do not win, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

Next, specific specifications of the game in each game state will be described. The fluctuation time that can be selected in the pachinko machine 100 is divided into four, in order from the shortest time, "short time" is 1 second to 5 seconds, "normal time" is 15 seconds to 30 seconds, and "long time 1" is 60. When the seconds are divided into 90 seconds and "long time 2" is divided into 120 seconds to 180 seconds, the frequency of selection of the variable time selected when the big hit is not won (big hit non-winning) according to each game state. Is set differently. The frequency of selection of the variable time of the jackpot non-winning in each gaming state is shown in the order of “⊚”, “◯”, “Δ”, “−” in FIG. 29 in order from the highest frequency.

In the normal game state, the normal time is most easily selected, and as the variable display of the normal time, the variable display of the loss without the reach display is executed in the unit game. Next, it is easy to select the long-time 1 which has the longest time next to the normal time, and the variable display of the loss reach is mainly executed. The variable display of long time 2 longer than long time 1 is set to occur the least frequently, and when the variable display of long time 2 is passed, the percentage of big hit wins is high, and the variable display with high expectation of big hit winning is executed. Will be done. The short-time fluctuation is not selected, or is set to be more difficult to be selected than the long-time 2.

In the probabilistic game state, the fluctuation time selected by the five probabilistic states A to E is different. In the probabilistic state A and the probabilistic state D, a short-time fluctuation display occupies most of the time, and the other fluctuation times are big hits. Except for the case of, it is set to be rarely executed or hardly executed (for example, less than 1%). In the probabilistic states B and E, it is easy to select the variation display of 1 for a long time, which is longer than the probabilistic states A and D, and in the probabilistic state B, it is easy to perform the effect of loss reach accompanied by the appearance of a specific character. In the probabilistic state E, an end effect accompanied by a display or voice telling the player that the probabilistic state has ended is executed. In the probabilistic state C, the short-time fluctuation display and the long-time 1 fluctuation display are executed at substantially the same ratio.

Regarding the jackpot probability, the normal gaming state is set to a low probability, and the probability variation gaming state is set to a higher probability than the normal gaming state. As a big hit privilege, in the normal gaming state, the game ball can be opened for a long time so that the game ball can enter the winning opening of the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 over a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds or 16 rounds). The approach permissible posture corresponding to the state continues, and in the probabilistic gaming state, it is set to be more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the open state for a long time over a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is set to continue. ..

The small hit probability changes according to the gaming state, and is set to a low probability (for example, 1 / 288.5, which is the same as the big hit probability in the normal gaming state) in the normal gaming state and the probabilistic variation states A to C. Has been done. On the other hand, in the probability change state D, the probability is set to be higher than that in the normal game state, and for example, if the big hit lottery is missed, the small hit is always won. Among the values of the winning random number counters, the number of jackpot winning values is set to be larger in the probabilistic state (for example, "20") than in the normal gaming state (for example, "2"). In the probabilistic states D and E, all the values of the winning random number counters other than the big hit winning value are set as the small hit winning values. In the probabilistic states D and E, the small hit is established with an extremely higher probability than the big hit, and the small hit winning is likely to occur continuously because the games corresponding to the probabilistic states D and E are continuous.

The small hit privilege is set as a certain privilege in both the normal gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state. As this small hit privilege, an open state in which the game ball can enter the winning opening of the lower large winning device 433 occurs for a predetermined opening time (for example, 3 seconds).

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 due to a small hit will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the progress of time in the probabilistic gaming state and the number of balls that the player can acquire by paying out the game balls (hereinafter referred to as the number of acquired balls). Here, the number of acquired balls is the number of difference balls obtained by subtracting the number of balls fired in the game area from the number of prize balls paid out by winning.

In the pachinko machine 100, when a big hit is won in the normal gaming state, one transition pattern is determined from a plurality of types of transition patterns in which the timing of switching the internal state in the probabilistic gaming state is different, and the game proceeds according to the transition pattern. FIG. 30A shows a case where the jackpot is won and the transition to the probabilistic gaming state is performed, and the pattern 65 is selected as the transition pattern and the jackpot is not won in the probabilistic gaming state and the transition to the normal gaming state is performed. Illustrate.

The pattern 65 is a pattern in which the number of remaining unit games in which the fixed reach is generated is 68 times and the number of remaining unit games in which the lottery reach is generated is 32 times (see FIG. 13). That is, if the jackpot is not won in the probabilistic game state, the unit game in the probabilistic state A is executed 31 times in total from 1 to 31 times (remaining unit game number = 100 to 69), and the 32nd time (remaining unit game number). In the unit game of = 68), the unit game in the probability change state B is executed once, and a loss reach occurs in the unit game.

After that, it returns to the probability change state A, the unit game is executed 35 times in total from the 33rd time to the 67th time (remaining unit game number = 67 to 33), and the probability change state C in the 68th time (remaining unit game number = 32). The unit game in is executed once. In the unit game in the probability change state C, the fluctuation display accompanied by the loss reach or the short-time fluctuation display similar to the probability change state A is executed with a probability of 1/2.

After that, the unit game in the probability change state D is executed a total of 31 times from the 69th time to the 99th time (the number of remaining unit games = 31 to 1). In the unit game of the probability variation state D, if the big hit is not won, the small hit is won, and the fluctuation display for about 3 seconds is executed based on the start winning prize related to the second special symbol. After that, the second special symbol corresponding to the small hit winning is fixedly stopped, and an advantageous gaming state is generated due to the entry allowable posture of the lower prize winning device 433 for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds). As a result, a predetermined number of prizes (for example, 5 on average) are generated in one unit game, and the predetermined number is multiplied by the number of prize balls (for example, 13) for one prize. The number of game balls (for example, 5 × 13 = 65) is given to the player as a privilege by paying out for one small hit. The number of acquired balls is the number obtained by subtracting the number of shot balls for 10 balls fired in approximately 6 seconds, which is the sum of the time of the variable display and the time of the advantageous gaming state, from the payout for the small hit (for example, 55). Is set to.

Here, the number of winnings in one unit game is not necessarily a fixed number, and a predetermined number (5) of game balls are allowed to win after the lower large winning device 433 is in the entry allowable posture. There are cases where an extra game ball wins before the winning of the prize is detected and the game shifts to the entry prohibited posture, or the game ball may shift to the entry prohibited posture without reaching the predetermined number. In this explanation, the number of winnings will be simplified and described, and the same shall apply hereinafter. The number of balls acquired in one unit game in which a small hit occurs and the number of balls acquired in a special game state depend on the structure of the lower prize-winning device 433 of the pachinko machine 100, the shape of the path through which the game balls flow, and the like. It is adjustable, and by actually measuring the number of acquired balls and adjusting the shape of the structural part, the position of the switch, the duration of the allowable approach posture, the number of winnings for one small hit, etc. Can be fine-tuned.

In the unit game of the probability change state E, the variation display of the special symbol longer than the probability variation state D (for example, the variation display of about 60 seconds) is executed based on the start winning prize related to the second special symbol. After that, the second special symbol corresponding to the small hit winning is fixedly stopped, and an advantageous gaming state is generated due to the entry allowable posture of the lower prize winning device 433 for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) as in the probability change state D. , It is possible to acquire more game balls than the unit game in the probability change state D. That is, the privilege of the small hit winning game state corresponding to the total number of unit games of the probability change state D and the probability change state E is given to the player after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the probability change state.

In one probabilistic game state, the privilege for one small hit corresponds to the number of unit games in probabilistic states D and E, and when the transition pattern is pattern 65, it is acquired as a privilege for one small hit. A number of game balls obtained by multiplying the number of balls by the number of unit games of 31 times (for example, 55 balls x 31 times = approximately 1700 pieces) is given to the player as a privilege. This number of game balls is larger than the number of acquired balls in the special game state of 16 rounds controlled after the big hit is won, and the player not only generates the special game state but also the probability change state in the subsequent probability change game state. Play the game in anticipation of the start of D.

After the unit game of the probability change state E is executed, the game state shifts from the probability change game state to the normal game state, and the number of acquired balls once acquired by continuing the game is gradually consumed.

As shown in FIG. 30A, the number of acquired balls from the big hit winning via the special gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state gradually increases in the special gaming states, the probabilistic variation states D and E, and the probabilistic variation. It gradually decreases in states A to C. First, the number of acquired balls increases depending on the special game state after the big hit occurs.

In the special gaming state, the number of acquired balls is determined according to the continuous round determined based on the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter as the type of the special gaming state. In the special game state, the number of prize balls (8) as a condition for shifting from the entry-allowed posture to the entry-prohibited posture in one round is multiplied by the number of prize balls (13) paid out by winning the game ball. The number of game balls (104) is basically paid out after one round has passed. However, the number of acquired balls is not a certain number because a round occurs in which a game ball enters the large winning device and a large number of game balls are paid out immediately before shifting to the entry prohibited posture. The number of balls acquired in the special gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 is set to, for example, about 500 if the 6 rounds are won, and about 1500 if the 16 rounds are won, which is more than in the case of the 6 rounds.

In the probabilistic gaming state, among the probabilistic states A to E, in the probabilistic states A to C corresponding to some of the states, the number of acquired balls does not increase as compared with the special gaming state, and the quantity is maintained close to a certain level. In detail, it is set to gradually decrease. By setting the number of acquired balls to gradually decrease rather than a fixed amount in the probabilistic states A to C, the situation of the acquired balls can be changed according to the length of the period of the probabilistic states A to C, and the acquired balls can be acquired. It is possible to make the number of balls significantly different according to the pattern selected as the transition pattern, and to provide the player with various playability due to the change in the transition pattern. It should be noted that the probable change states A to C may be set so that the number of fired balls and the number of prize balls match, and as a result, the number of acquired balls does not decrease and the situation is maintained close to a constant value, which is substantially the same as the normal gaming state. It may be set to reduce the number of game balls at the rate of.

In the probabilistic gaming state, among the probabilistic states A to E, in the probabilistic states D and E corresponding to some of the states, the number of acquired balls increases as compared with the probabilistic change states A to C. This increase in the number of acquired balls is due to the fact that advantageous gaming states based on the winning of small hits occur multiple times in a row, and the length according to the transition pattern causes the timing of the probable change state C to occur multiple times. You can enjoy the benefits of an advantageous game state in which you can continue to acquire game balls for a certain period of time through the unit game of. For example, when the pattern 65 is selected as the transition pattern, approximately 1700 pieces are used, and in the pattern 7 in which the probability variation state D continues for the longest time among the transition patterns, the unit games of the probability variation states D and E continue 67 times. The number of acquired balls is approximately 3700. On the other hand, in the pattern 105 in which the probability change state D is the shortest among the transition patterns, the unit games of the probability change states D and E are continued 12 times, and the number of acquired balls is approximately 650. In this way, even if the big hit is not won in the probabilistic game state, after a certain unit game is executed, the player is given a privilege by winning the small hit.

Next, a case where a big hit is won in the probabilistic game state will be described. FIG. 30B shows a case where the jackpot is won and the transition to the probabilistic gaming state is performed. After the pattern 7 is selected as the transition pattern and the special gaming state is executed, the probabilistic gaming state is started and the probabilistic gaming state is started. The case where a special gaming state and a probabilistic gaming state in which the pattern 105 is a transition pattern is executed by further winning a big hit is illustrated. Pattern 7 is a transition pattern in which the probability variation state D is set for a long time, and as shown by the line with the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 30B, if the jackpot is not won during the probability variation game state, the special game state More prize balls can be obtained from the middle to the end of the probabilistic game state, and for example, the number of acquired balls can be expected to be approximately 4,500.

However, if the second big hit is won in the middle of the probabilistic gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state of another transition pattern is started, and the transition pattern with a short probability variation state D is selected, the special gaming state occurs. Even if the number of game balls increases, the increase in the number of game balls in the probabilistic game state is less than the transition pattern (pattern 7) before the big hit occurs, and the number of balls acquired as the final output ball decreases even if the big hit occurs. Cases can occur. For this reason, the player expects the occurrence of a big hit, but is worried that the number of balls won by the small hit winning that could have been initially obtained due to the occurrence of the big hit will decrease. .. Contrary to this case, if a transition pattern with a short number of probable change states D is selected and then a transition pattern with a long number of times is selected, a large amount of game balls will be acquired, and the transition pattern will be acquired. It is possible to add a variety of playability in which the benefits given to the player vary depending on the selection order.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 due to the preceding effect will be described. In the pachinko machine 100, the earlier the timing at which the probability change state D is started, the more the number of acquired balls until the probability change game state ends. Therefore, the player plays the game in the probabilistic gaming state in anticipation of the early start of the probabilistic state D in addition to the big hit winning. In the probabilistic game state, the preceding effect is executed, and the player is informed of the big hit winning and the start time of the probable change state D.

The advance effect for the big hit winning is set in the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), and the hold command to which the big hit winning information is added is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub control board 940 when the start winning is generated. , The display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled in response to the hold command. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the number of hold display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed by the number of hold displays by the side-by-side circles, and the hold display of the second special symbol is displayed by a large circle. In the case, a blue circle is additionally displayed for the hold display of the unit game that has not won the big hit based on the normal start prize, and the hold display of the unit game that has won the big hit is not won. Hold display in a different mode (for example, additional display of a circle that changes to rainbow color). The player can visually recognize not only the number of times the unit game is held has increased, but also the display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 that the unit game that wins the big hit has been held. Further, when the sub-control board 940 receives a hold command to which the jackpot winning information is added, the hold command to which the loss reach occurrence information described later is added is sub-controlled with a certain probability (for example, a probability of 1/10). The display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled in the same manner as when the board 940 is received, and it is set to suggest that a special gaming state may occur due to a big hit after the reach effect.

As the preceding effect for the start time of the probability change state D, a plurality of types of preceding effects are set. One is an undetermined pre-production (hereinafter referred to as pre-confirmation pre-production) in a situation where the execution is not yet determined, although it has been selected as the start time of the probabilistic state D, and the other is probabilistic change. It is a preceding effect after the execution is confirmed after the start of the state D is confirmed (hereinafter, referred to as a preceding effect after the confirmation). In the following, the content displayed as the pre-determined preceding effect is referred to as the pre-determined preceding effect display, and the content displayed as the post-confirmed preceding effect is referred to as the post-confirmed preceding effect display.

The pre-determination advance effect can be executed when the right of the unit game 9 times before the probability change state C is established by the start winning prize. Specifically, in the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), a hold command to which advantageous game approach information is added is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub control board 940 when a start prize is generated, and the hold is held. The display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled in response to the command. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the remaining unit game number display corresponding to the remaining unit game number displayed by the number "55" in the central portion of the display area is normally lit and displayed with a constant brightness, and is displayed as a sub. When the control board 940 receives a hold command with advantageous game approach information added, in addition to additionally displaying a circle mark for the increase in hold of the unit game, the remaining unit game number display blinks as a pre-confirmation preceding effect display. This blinking display continues until the probability change game state ends or the jackpot is won. The player recognizes that not only the number of times the unit game is held has increased, but also the probability change state D following the probability change state C can be started in the unit game about 10 times later, which is advantageous for continuous small hit winnings. You can expect a game state. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the playability of visually recognizing the change in the aspect of the remaining unit game number in the expectation that the blinking display of the remaining unit game number display will be started at an early stage.

If a big hit is won by the start winning prize established after the blinking display of the remaining unit game number display is started, the probabilistic game state ends and the game shifts to the special game state. Therefore, even if the blinking display of the number of remaining unit games is started, the unit games in the probability change state D are not necessarily executed. In this way, the blinking display of the number of remaining unit games is a pre-determination preceding effect for the probability change state D.

Further, the other pre-determined predecessor effects may be executed when the right of the unit game in the probabilistic state C is established by the start winning prize. When the right of the unit game in the probabilistic state C is established, the pre-determined advance effect by the hold display and the pre-determination advance effect by executing the effect of the loss reach are executed. In the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), the hold command with the advantageous game start information is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub control board 940 when the start prize is generated. The display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled in response to the hold command. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, a hold display corresponding to an increase in hold of a unit game displayed as a circle in the lower portion of the display area is additionally displayed with a blue circle in normal times, and the sub-control board 940 is advantageous. When a hold command with game execution information is received, a circle mark for the increase in hold of the unit game is additionally displayed in green as a pre-confirmation preceding effect display. That is, the mode corresponding to the addition of the unit game right for the above-mentioned probability change states A and B (blue circle) and the mode corresponding to the addition of the unit game right to the jackpot winning (rainbow-colored circle). Performs a hold display corresponding to the addition of a unit game right in another mode (green circle). The hold display of the unit game in green is shifted to the left each time the unit game being executed ends, and is continuously displayed until the unit game in the probability change state C is started.

Further, if the jackpot lottery is not won in the probability change state C, the reach effect accompanied by the second reach display is executed with a half probability. The player can start the probabilistic state D from the next unit game with a display (pre-confirmation preceding effect display) in which the reach effect accompanied by the reach display twice after the probabilistic game state is started is confirmed and stopped with a lost symbol. You can recognize that. That is, it is possible to suggest the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state by the number of executions of the reach effect as the mode of the variable display, and the control of the occurrence of this advantageous gaming state can be realized by using the transition pattern. In addition, the preceding effect can be easily realized only by changing the gaming state according to the preset fluctuation time. Further, since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in which the reach effect is executed is set to be longer than the fluctuation display in the probability variation state A in which the reach effect is not executed, there is an advantage such as "chance time generation" using that time. After executing a variable display with an effect suggesting a different gaming state and performing an effect that clearly distinguishes the switching of the gaming state, it is possible to shift to an advantageous gaming state by the probability change state D.

Further, if the jackpot lottery is not won in the probability change state C, a short-time variable display is selected with a half probability. The player is expected that the probabilistic state D can be started from the next unit game even if the reach effect accompanied by the reach display twice after the probabilistic game state is started does not stop with a lost symbol. Can be done. That is, even when the number of times the reach effect is executed as a mode of variable display does not reach a predetermined number of times, an advantageous gaming state can be generated by using the transition pattern. Further, as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in which the reach effect is not executed, a fluctuation time equivalent to (or the same as) the fluctuation display of the probability variation state A is set, and a suddenly advantageous gaming state starts after a series of monotonous situations. It is possible for the player to enjoy the situation. Thereby, it is possible to provide the game property of shifting to an advantageous game state by the probability change state D by various modes different from the effect of clearly distinguishing the switching of the game state.

If a loss reach occurs during the probabilistic game state, a hold command to which the loss reach occurrence information is added is set. Specifically, in the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), a hold command to which loss reach occurrence information is added is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub control board 940 when a start prize is generated, and the hold is held. The display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled in response to the command. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the hold display corresponding to the hold increase of the unit game displayed by a circle in the lower part of the display area is lit by a blue circle when a normal hold command is received. When the sub-control board 940 receives the hold command to which the loss reach occurrence information is added, the blue circle mark corresponding to the hold increase of the unit game is blinking and displayed. The hold display of the unit game by this blinking display is shifted to the left each time the unit game being executed ends, and is continuously displayed until the unit game is started.

Since the occurrence of two lost reach will result in a transition to an advantageous gaming state, the player can expect the transition to an advantageous gaming state by recognizing the occurrence of the loss reach by the blinking display of the hold display. Since it can be done, the blinking display of the blue circle for the increase in hold also corresponds to the pre-confirmation preceding effect display. Further, even when the sub-control board 940 receives the hold command with the jackpot winning information added, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled in the same manner as when the hold command with the loss reach occurrence information is received. Therefore, by visually recognizing the blinking display of the blue circle, the player can expect the occurrence of a special gaming state based on the big hit winning.

The pre-determined effect can be executed when a start winning prize is generated for the execution of the probability change state D. Specifically, in the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), a hold command to which advantageous game execution information is added is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub control board 940 when a start prize is generated, and the hold is held. The display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled in response to the command. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, a hold display corresponding to an increase in hold of a unit game displayed as a circle in the lower portion of the display area is additionally displayed with a blue circle in normal times, and the sub-control board 940 is advantageous. When a hold command with game execution information is received, the hold display is additionally displayed in red. This red-colored unit game hold display corresponds to the preceding effect display after confirmation, and is displayed by shifting to the left each time the running unit game ends, and is continuously displayed until the unit game starts. To. The probability change state D is continuously displayed a plurality of times until the number of remaining unit games becomes one, and the hold display of the unit game in red suggesting the start of execution of the probability change state D is continuously displayed for the number of consecutive times. The player recognizes that not only the hold of the unit game has increased, but also the game in the probabilistic state D is repeatedly executed a plurality of times, and the confirmation of the start of the advantageous game state in which the small hit winnings are continuous is recognized. be able to. For this reason, expecting that the blinking display of the remaining unit games will start at an early stage, the change in the mode of the remaining unit games will be visually recognized, and after confirming the blinking display, the preceding effect display is expected after confirmation. You can enjoy the playability.

According to the pachinko machine 100 described above, in the winning determination process S1403, the value of the jackpot symbol random value acquired by the start winning is determined, and the transition of the probabilistic gaming state after the special gaming state corresponding to the jackpot symbol random value. The pattern is set. There are 120 types of transition patterns (patterns 1 to 120, patterns 1 to 120, in which the timings of the probabilistic states B and C are different among the probabilistic states A to E, and the length of the probabilistic state D that is performed after the probabilistic state C is different. (See FIG. 13) is set. In the probabilistic game state, the probabilistic state in which the small hit winnings that are advantageous to the player as compared with the normal game state are continuously performed by the combination of the multiple unit games executed based on the start winning of the second special symbol multiple times. A probabilistic gaming state including D and E is generated by the control of the main control board 920.

In the probabilistic game state, the start time of the probabilistic state D is determined by the number of remaining credit units for which the lottery reach is generated, which is determined according to the transition pattern, and the probabilistic change in which small hits are continuously generated as the content of the privilege given to the player. The number of unit games in the state D is different, and the time when the probability change state D is started after the probability change game state as the granting time of the privilege is started is also different.

In the winning determination process S1403, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random value corresponding to the probabilistic gaming state according to each transition pattern has been acquired, and the stop symbol identification value is determined by the subsequent stop symbol generation process S1404. Then, the stop symbol based on the stop symbol identification value is displayed before the start of the special gaming state by either the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol or the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, and is stopped. A probabilistic game state is generated by a transition pattern according to the pattern number corresponding to the symbol identification value.

In this way, since the transition pattern of the probability variation game state is determined by the setting of the transition pattern before the start of the probability variation game state, there are a plurality of types of continuous games composed of unit games based on a plurality of start prizes as the probability variation game state. It can be implemented in different ways according to the transition pattern. Further, since the start time of the probability change state D is determined by the transition pattern, the preceding effect corresponding to the start time of the probability change state D can be easily controlled based on the number of remaining unit games predetermined according to the transition pattern. And the information about the probability change state D can be suitably transmitted to the player.

Further, before the probabilistic gaming state is started, the information corresponding to the specific gaming state to be executed is obtained by either the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol or the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol. Since it is displayed, the content that can be executed as the probabilistic gaming state is displayed in advance by the display device mounted on the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, when an attempt is made to improperly modify the pachinko machine 100, it becomes necessary to cheat including the consistency between the displayed contents and the start time of the probabilistic state D, making it difficult to adjust the period of the probabilistic state D, and a crime. It is possible to efficiently suppress fraudulent acts in which a person tries to gain unfair profits. In particular, the display content displayed by the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is determined by control combining calculation and replacement as described above, and a large number of stop symbol identification values can be set, so that the stop symbol can be set. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally reproduce the method of generating the display content as the identification value.

In addition, since the content and timing of the privilege being granted can be set in advance before the start of the specific gaming state, and the information corresponding to the content can be shown to the player in advance, simply by winning one unit game. A gaming machine that can combine a new gameplay in which benefits are granted across multiple unit games compared to the gameplay in which benefits are granted, and a production that expects the benefits to be granted at an early stage. Can be provided. In addition, by applying a plurality of control patterns to each unit game, it is possible to control a probabilistic game state composed of a plurality of unit games, so that a small hit as a privilege given by executing the probabilistic game state can be achieved. It is possible to easily control the size corresponding to the number of winnings and the number of times the reach effect is executed.

In addition, the probability change state D in which the unit game in which the privilege is easily given to the player as compared with the normal game state is continuously performed a plurality of times, and the unit game in which the privilege is less likely to be given as compared with the probability change state D is continuously performed a plurality of times. It is executed after the execution of ~ C. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with not only a lottery for each unit game in the probabilistic game state but also a playability that expects the early start of the probabilistic state D to be started later.

In addition, before the start winning of the unit game in which the probability change state D is started and before the start prize is established, the hold display in green and the blinking display of the number of remaining unit games are displayed as the pre-confirmation preceding effect display. Suggests to the player the start time of the probabilistic state D. Therefore, the expectation for the start of the probability change state D can be increased from an early stage before the start prize corresponding to the unit game of the probability change state D.

Further, before the probability change state D is started and after the start prize of the unit game in which the probability change state D is started is established, as the post-confirmation preceding effect display set in a mode different from the pre-confirmation preceding effect display. The hold display in red suggests the start of the probabilistic state D to the player. Therefore, as a period during which the start of the probabilistic state D can be definitely expected, the hold display in green is visually recognized, then the hold display in red is visually recognized, and finally the probabilistic state D is started. It is possible to carry out an effect that gradually raises the expectation for the grant.

Further, after the start winning of the unit game in which the probability change state D is started is established, the post-determination preceding effect display is displayed in a mode different from the pre-confirmation preceding effect display. For this reason, the preceding effect display is displayed at an early stage after confirmation, and it is possible to avoid the situation where the grant of benefits is invalidated depending on the progress of the game after that, and it is difficult to generate the starting prize. It is possible to display the privilege grant timing information corresponding to the privilege grant timing at a suitable timing that does not cause inconvenience such as forcing the player to consume a considerable amount of time and the game ball until the privilege is granted.

In addition, it is possible to make the player identify that the pre-determined preceding effect display is an effect in which the gaming state may be changed after that and is different from the post-determined preceding effect display by the difference in mode. .. Therefore, after the start time of the probable change state D is suggested by the pre-confirmation preceding effect display, the game state may be changed by the big hit winning by the subsequent start prize, and the start prize is difficult to be set. By notifying the player in advance that there is a possibility of forcing the player to consume a certain amount or more of the game ball by the time the probabilistic state D is started, the game is played due to the occurrence of these situations. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a person will feel dissatisfied.

Further, in the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), the winning random number corresponding to the big hit winning among the unit game being executed using the big hit storage flag and the unit game whose start has already been suspended and not being executed. To check if there is a unit game in which the value of the counter is stored, and if there is a unit game corresponding to the big hit winning, set a normal hold command (process of S1802 in FIG. 27) and execute the above-mentioned preceding effect. (Specifically, each process of adding the loss reach occurrence information, the advantageous game start information, the advantageous game start information, the advantageous game execution information, and the advantageous game approach information to the hold command) is set not to be executed. ing. For this reason, for the start prize that is established after the change of the game state is confirmed due to the transition of the game state due to the big hit winning, the situation where the game state changes after the execution of the pre-confirmation preceding effect is suppressed, and the big hit is used. Only in the situation where the change of the game state does not occur, the preceding effect can be executed after the confirmation.

Further, when a big hit is won during the probabilistic game state, the probabilistic game state shifts to the special game state before the predetermined 100 unit games are executed. Therefore, even if the stop symbol identification value displayed on the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 is visually recognized to understand the transition pattern and, for example, the player recognizes the occurrence of the probabilistic state D for a long period of time, the subsequent occurrence of the probabilistic state D is recognized. Depending on the jackpot winning, there may be a situation where the probability change state D is not executed, and the progress of the game can be diversified. Therefore, it is necessary to avoid the inconvenience that the content of the probabilistic game state is uniquely selected before the start of the probabilistic game state, and then the operation of the probabilistic change state D makes the player feel monotonous as if the number of acquired balls is obtained. Can be done. In addition, the expected value of the number of acquired balls including the probabilistic gaming state by winning the jackpot is a large quantity corresponding to the case where all of the probabilistic state D is executed, and the actual winning balls when the jackpot is subsequently won. The number can be less than the expected value of the sum of all probabilistic states D. Therefore, it is easy to set a large number of acquired balls expected by the player, and it is possible to make a suitable setting that suppresses excessive gambling. Moreover, since the game shifts to the special gaming state by winning the jackpot, even if at least some of the benefits expected during the probabilistic gaming state are not given to the player, a new special gaming state and the probabilistic gaming that can be transferred after that. It is possible to give the player a sense of gain due to different benefits depending on the state, and it is possible to reduce the sense of loss that the player has.

In the probabilistic state D, the variable time is set to the shortest short time as compared with other game states, and the unit game with a high probability of winning a small hit is continuously executed. For this reason, the unit game in which the ratio of the ball-entry period in which the lower-ranking prize-winning device 433 can be won is long is continuously generated a plurality of times, and the player is efficiently provided with the privilege at the timing of the probability-change state D during the probability-change game state. Can be granted.

The fluctuation time in the probability variation game state can be controlled by controlling the transition pattern, and the probability variation state C in which the unit game with a long variation time accompanied by the reach effect is easily executed is set as the unit game one time before the start of the probability variation state D. There is. For this reason, it is preferable to make the execution of the reach effect correspond to the time when the privilege is given due to the probability change state D, to make the unit game for which the time when the privilege is expected to be easily noticed to the player, and to suggest the time when the privilege is given. Can be executed.

In the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), when the start prize is generated during the period in which the execution of the unit game is suspended, the target number of times corresponding to the execution time of the unit game in which the start prize is generated is set. Derived based on the number of remaining unit games of the running unit game. For this reason, the storage area of the RAM used as the unit game number storage unit is reduced and both times are reduced as compared with the case where the target number of unit games in which the start winning is generated and the number of remaining unit games are managed separately. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the update of the update will be out of sync.

In the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), based on the target number of times derived once, another number of game states such as one time before or nine times after the target number of times is also determined. Therefore, it is possible to summarize the process of deriving the number of times required for the execution determination of each effect, and it is possible to reduce the processing load required for executing various effects.

<Control of the entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA>
Next, control of whether or not to allow the game ball to enter the specific passage TA when a big hit is won in the lottery relating to the special symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 35. First, the structure of the winning device unit 600 including the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 that controls whether or not the game ball can enter the specific passage TA will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, and then special. The operation of the winning device unit 600 in the gaming state will be described.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flow path of the right side portion of the game area. 32 is a structural explanatory view of the winning device unit 600, FIG. 32 (A) shows the configuration of the winning device unit 600 from the front side, and FIG. 32 (B) shows the ball transport device 602 in a plan view. The state is schematically shown. For ease of understanding, in the drawings after FIG. 31, the letter "V" is added to the position of the specific passage TA and the letter "N" is added to the position of the non-specific passage TB, if necessary. An example of a game ball flowing down the flow path is shown by a solid line, and the flow path of the game ball is shown by an arrow. Further, FIG. 32 (A) shows a state in which the front cover 612 of the winning device unit 600 is removed, and FIG. 32 (B) shows the operating direction of the ball transport device 602 with an arrow, and the transport passage KT (connection) is shown. The passage KD) is shown by a chain line, and the position of the lower prize winning device 433 is shown by a solid line.

As shown in FIG. 31, the winning device unit 600 is arranged on the front side of the game board 400 and on the lower right side of the game area. When the game is played by a right-handed game technique in which the game ball is flowed down from the right side of the central structure 420, the game ball is a flow path (right side flow path) of the right part of the game area corresponding to the right side of the central structure 420. It flows downward via KR). On the right side of the game board 400, along the right flow path KR, a combination operating device 435, a starting device 436, a starting winning device 432, an upper prize winning device 434, and a lower prize winning device 433 are provided in this order from the upstream side. ing. When the game is played by the right-handed game method, the flow direction of the game ball is controlled by the flow change members such as the nail 411 provided on the upstream side of each device 432 to 436 and the wall surface of the central structure 420, and the flow direction of each device 432 is controlled. The game ball is guided to the arrangement position of each device 432 to 436 at a constant ratio set with respect to 436.

The winning device unit 600 includes a transparent synthetic resin substrate 611, a lower prize winning device 433, an upper prize winning device 434, a ball transfer device 602, and a distribution mechanism 601. The plurality of large winning devices 433 and 434 and the distribution mechanism 601 are attached to the base 611 to form an integrated winning device unit 600, and then attached to the base 401 of the game board 400. A transparent synthetic resin front cover 612 is attached to the front surface of the winning device unit 600 as a part of the base 611, and easily contacts the game ball flowing down inside the winning device unit 600 from the front side of the game board 400. It is said that it cannot be configured. The winning device unit 600 does not necessarily have to be configured by integrating a plurality of large winning devices 433,434,601 and a distribution mechanism 601, and some devices or all the devices are separate parts of the game board 400. The winning device unit 600 may be configured by a device attached to the substrate 401 and separated into a plurality of pieces.

As shown in FIG. 32 (A), the winning device unit 600 is provided with a connection passage KD connecting the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 as a part of the right flow path KR. The connection passage KD is formed by the base 611 of the winning device unit 600, and a transport passage KT inclined upward toward the downstream side (in the direction of the arrow indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 32 (A)) is provided in a part thereof. .. The transport passage KT is configured so that the game ball cannot proceed to the downstream side by its own weight, and the transport passage KT is provided with a ball transport device 602 for transporting the game ball. The game ball that has reached the transport passage KT can be transported by the ball transport device 602 to the diagonally upper side (the diagonally upper left side of FIG. 32A) as the downstream side of the right flow path KR.

As shown in FIG. 32 (A), the ball transfer device 602 is attached to the base 611 so as to be located on the rear side with respect to the transfer passage KT, and a part thereof is formed through the opening 613 formed in the base 611. It protrudes into the transport passage KT. As shown in FIG. 32B, the ball transfer device 602 includes a rubber belt 621, a pulley 622 as a support for supporting the belt 621 at a plurality of points along the continuous direction of the transfer passage KT, and a belt. It is provided with a ball transport unit 623 made of synthetic resin integrated into the belt 621 so as to project from 621 to the transport passage KT side, and a transport motor 624 (see FIG. 10) composed of a stepping motor to rotate the belt 621. ing.

The ball transport unit 623 projects into the transport passage KT so as to be located above the bottom surface of the transport passage KT by the radius of the game ball, and the transport motor 624 operates to cause the game ball in the transport passage KT to operate. , The ball is transported to the downstream side where the lower prize winning device 433 is provided while the ball transport unit 623 supports the diagonally lower side one by one.

The transfer motor 624 operates under the control of the main control board 920, and always operates at a constant speed from the power-on of the pachinko machine 100. The operating speed of the transfer motor 624 is such that the lower prize winning device 433 is installed after a certain period of time (for example, approximately 3.0 seconds) has elapsed from the game ball flowing down from the installation position of the upper prize winning device 434 via the connection passage KD. It is set to reach the position. Then, from the installation position of the upper prize winning device 434 to the entrance of the specific passage TA provided inside the lower prize winning device 433, a predetermined time (for example, about 3.6 seconds) is set to the shortest flow time (shortest flow time). ), The game ball flows down.

Further, the operating speed of the transfer motor 624 is substantially the same as or slightly shorter than the launch time interval of the game ball (for example, a short time at a rate of approximately 70% to approximately 90%) from the ball transfer device 602. It is set that the game balls are individually flowed down to the downstream side where the lower prize winning device 433 is located. Therefore, it is less likely that the game ball stays on the upstream side of the ball transport device 602, and the game ball flows down to the downstream side at regular intervals by the ball transport device 602, and the lower prize winning device 433. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game balls will interfere with each other and the speed will be extremely reduced or the game will be stopped when the game balls flow down along the inclination inside the inside or the like.

The distribution mechanism 601 places the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 (that is, the game ball that has won the lower prize opening 433A) in the non-specific passage TB formed in the internal region of the lower prize opening 433A, or It is distributed to a specific passage TA. The distribution mechanism 601 has a guide posture in which a plate-shaped shutter provided at the entrance portion of the specific passage TA operates by driving a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) to allow the game ball to enter the specific passage TA. It is possible to switch between a non-guided posture in which the game ball is allowed to enter the non-specific passage TB without allowing the game ball to enter the specific passage TA. If the distribution mechanism 601 is in a non-guided posture, the game ball that has entered the inside of the lower prize opening 433A passes over the shutter that blocks the entrance of the specific passage TA and proceeds to the non-specific passage TB. If the distribution mechanism 601 is in the guiding posture and the entrance of the specific passage TA is open, the game ball that has entered the inside of the lower prize winning opening 433A enters the specific passage TA.

Next, the operation control of the winning device unit 600 (specifically, the lower prize winning device 433, the upper prize winning device 434, and the distribution mechanism 601) in the special gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the operation control of the winning device unit 600, and FIG. 34 is a timing chart showing the main operation of the winning device unit 600. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the operation of the winning device unit 600, and illustrates a main state in which the winning device unit 600 shown in FIG. 32 (A) operates during the special gaming state. In FIG. 35, for the sake of easy understanding, the lower entry control mechanism 453 in the approach allowable posture and the distribution mechanism 601 in the guided posture are shown by a alternate long and short dash line.

In the special gaming state, the operation of the lower prize winning device 433, the upper prize winning device 434, and the distribution mechanism 601 is controlled by the main control board 920, and the prize ball is paid out as a game value grant compared to the normal gaming state. It becomes a state that is likely to occur. There are two types of this special game state, a special game state in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA and a special game state in which the game ball cannot enter the specific passage TA, and the game ball enters the specific passage TA. The main control board 920 controls whether or not to allow the main control board.

The state in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA occurs in a part of the round composed of a plurality of times, and the distribution mechanism 601 operates to open the entrance of the specific passage TA (hereinafter referred to as a round). , It is called a specific round, and is limited to the sixth round) in this embodiment. In addition, whether or not to allow the game ball to enter the specific passage TA in the specific round is determined after the round immediately before the specific round (the fifth round in the present embodiment) is completed before the specific round (the specific round). This is achieved by making the time (interval time) until the start of the 6th round) different.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the special game state, control is performed so that the game ball can enter the specific passage TA with a different probability depending on the type of the special symbol won by the big hit. In the case of winning the first special symbol, the game ball can enter the specific passage TA in a part of the long-term (16 rounds) special game state (long-term B in FIG. 22) with a large number of continuous rounds, and the rest. Specified in the short-term (6 rounds) special gaming state (short-term A and short-term B in FIG. 22) and a part of the long-term special gaming state (long-term A in FIG. 22), which is the special gaming state of It is set that the game ball cannot enter the passage TA. The winning ratio of these special gaming states determines the probability that a special gaming state in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA is generated, and this probability is set to 50%. In the case of winning the second special symbol, a special game in which the game ball enters the specific passage TA and the game ball can enter the specific passage TA in both short-term and long-term special game states with different numbers of continuous rounds. The probability that a condition will occur is set to 100%.

In the special game state, only a part is different depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific passage TA, and most of the common control is performed. In the following, the control of the long-term special game state is illustrated. 16-round jackpot that allows the game ball to enter the specific passage TA (hereinafter referred to as "16R jackpot (V prize)") and 16-round jackpot that the game ball cannot enter the specific passage TA (hereinafter referred to as "16R jackpot (V non-V)") A control example for (winning) ”) will be described. Regarding the 6-round jackpot with a short number of continuous rounds, the 7th and subsequent rounds are omitted for the 16-round jackpot, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When "16R jackpot (V winning)" occurs, as shown in FIG. 33, the upper jackpot winning device 434 is the same in each round from the first round to the fourth round and from the seventh round to the 16th round. It operates according to the opening pattern (continuous opening) and the end condition of. Each round is started by the upper entry control mechanism 454 of the upper prize winning device 434 taking an entry allowable posture that allows the game ball to enter the inside of the upper prize prize device 434, and the entry allowable posture is changed during each round. Continue (see FIG. 35 (A)).

Further, in each round, a predetermined number of play balls (for example, 8) as a condition for ending the round is detected by the upper prize winning switch 444, or the maximum entry allowance time (for example, 8) from the start of the round is reached. It ends when 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, and when this end condition is satisfied, the upper entry control mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture under the control of the main control board 920. The upper-sized prize-winning device 434 is provided with a winning opening (upper-sized winning opening 434A) having an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape on the rear side with respect to the right-side flow path KR. The plate-shaped lid member that closes the winning opening 434A opens and closes the upper winning opening 434A, and controls whether or not the game ball can enter the winning opening 434A. The interval time from the end of each round to the start of the next round is basically set to a fixed time (for example, 2.0 seconds), and only the time immediately before the specific round is the time of the game ball to the specific passage TA. It is set at different times depending on whether or not you can enter.

The 5th round in the "16R jackpot (V prize)" is the same as the previous rounds (1st to 4th rounds) in that the upper prize winning device 434 takes an admissible approach posture. The difference is that the conditions for ending the round are different so that the time required for the approach is longer. Specifically, the permissible number of entries in the 5th round is set to a different number (for example, 10) from the 1st to 4th rounds, so that the game ball flows down the right side flow path KR by the right-handed game method. If the game ball is fired, the fifth round will end at a timing different from that of the first to fourth rounds. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the gaming ball is launched into the gaming area by the launching device 330 at regular firing time intervals (approximately 0.6 seconds), and the firing is continued by the right-handed gaming technique. In the 1st to 4th rounds, each round is completed in the time (approximately 4.8 seconds) obtained by multiplying the firing time interval by the allowable number of approaches, and the 5th round is more than the previous rounds. The round ends after a long time has passed until a number of prizes are awarded.

Here, the player who tries to reduce the consumption of the game balls as much as possible wins the upper prize opening 434A by the number (8 pieces) of the game balls corresponding to the allowable number of entry in each round, and between the subsequent rounds. In order to reduce the number of game balls heading to the discharge port 401A as much as possible without winning a prize during the interval time, there is a possibility that the game balls are fired intermittently only at the timing when the prize is generated. When this intermittent launch of the game ball is performed immediately before the sixth round corresponding to the specific round, the lower prize winning device 433 and the distribution mechanism are used in the specific round so that the game ball can enter the specific passage TA. Even if the operation of 601 is controlled, there is a possibility that the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA, and the player invalidates the right to generate the probabilistic gaming state acquired with great effort, which is disadvantageous.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the end condition of the fifth round is set differently from that of the previous rounds. Therefore, when a player who performs an intermittent firing operation fires a game ball every eight balls as in the fourth round, the fifth round does not end. This clearly suggests to the player that the situation from the 5th round to the 6th round is different from the situation before that, and prompts the player to launch the game ball again toward the end of the 5th round. It is possible to increase the possibility of continuing the firing of the game ball until the sixth round. For example, if the game ball is not fired until the 6th round, the V prize will be invalidated on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 by information such as characters and figures, which may be difficult for the player to overlook. You can. As a result, in the specific round (sixth round), the launch of the game ball that causes the game ball to enter the specific passage TA is promoted, and the possibility that the player invalidates the right to generate the probabilistic gaming state is reduced. can do.

The end condition of the fifth round may be set to end in a shorter time until the fourth round. In this case, since the game ball is additionally fired by the same firing operation as up to the fourth round, the game ball can be flowed down toward the specific passage TA after the fifth round is completed. The end condition of the fifth round may be set to be the same as that of the fourth round, and in this case, the end control of the fifth round can be shared with the fourth round, which is preferable.

From the 5th round to the 6th round in the "16R jackpot (V prize)", as shown in FIG. 34 (A), it is a long time from the end of the 5th round ("5R" in FIG. 34 (A)). After an interval time (long interval), the sixth round (“6R” in FIG. 34 (A)) is started. During the fifth round, the upper entry control solenoid 464 is turned on, and the game ball that has reached in front of the upper prize winning device 434 enters the upper prize opening 434A (see FIG. 35 (A)). Therefore, during the fifth round, the game ball does not flow down to the connecting passage KD, and the game ball does not flow down to the lower prize winning device 433 side where the specific passage TA is provided (the period during which the game ball cannot flow down) (FIG. 34). See (A)).

In the 5th round, when the entry of the allowable number of game balls (10 pieces) into the upper prize opening 434A is detected by the upper prize winning switch 444, the 5th round ends and the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is turned off. (Time t1). When the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is turned off, the game ball that has reached the front of the upper prize winning device 434 does not win the upper prize winning opening 434A, and the game ball flows downward in front of the upper prize winning device 434. , The period during which the game ball can flow down to the lower prize winning device 433 side where the specific passage TA is provided (flowable period). This flowable period will continue until the 7th round is started and the opening of the upper prize opening 434A is started.

The time of the long interval from the 5th round to the 6th round is such that the game ball that has flowed down in front of the upper prize winning device 434 after the end of the 5th round is after the start of the 6th round and the distribution mechanism 601 is in a guided posture. The time is set so that the entrance of the specific passage TA can be reached during a certain period of time, for example, 3.0 seconds. During the long interval, the game ball that has flowed down in front of the upper prize winning device 434 after the end of the fifth round advances toward the entrance side of the specific passage TA, and the game ball is transported in the transport passage KT. Flow down the connecting passage KD including.

As described above, the shortest flow time (for example, 3.6 seconds) is required to reach the entrance of the specific passage TA via the connecting passage KD. Therefore, the game ball enters the specific passage TA with the shortest time (the shortest time that can be entered) as the time when the shortest flow time has elapsed from the end of the period during which the flow cannot flow to the specific passage TA side in the fifth round (time t2). When the distribution mechanism 601 is controlled so as to include a certain period after the shortest approachable time, an approachable period during which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA occurs. The lower approach restricting solenoid 463 is turned on before the shortest time when the entry is possible, and the sixth round is started. After the start of the sixth round, the game ball can flow down to the distribution mechanism 601 side.

Here, the length of the flow impossibility period in the 5th round is substantially the same as the time (6.0 seconds) obtained by multiplying the allowable number of entries (10 pieces) into the upper prize opening 434A in the 5th round by the firing time interval. The length of this non-flowable period is set longer than the shortest flow time (3.6 seconds). Therefore, when the fifth round ends and the sixth round starts, there is no game ball between the upper and lower winning openings 433A and 434A corresponding to the connecting passage KD. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball that has passed in front of the upper prize opening 434A in the interval time before the execution of the fifth round heads for the specific passage TA after the end of the fifth round. The length of the flow impossibility period in this fifth round may be set to be longer than twice the launch time interval of the game ball with respect to the shortest flow time in consideration of the variation in the flow time of the game ball. It is preferable to set it as long as 4 times or more of the firing time interval.

When the time of the long interval elapses after the end of the fifth round, the sixth round is started. At the start of this sixth round, there are no game balls in the connecting passage KD, and the game balls that follow after the last entry into the upper prize opening 434A in the fifth round move up toward the specific passage TA. It passes in front of the big winning opening 434A and proceeds to the downstream side.

In the sixth round, the lower prize winning device 433 and the distribution mechanism 601 operate. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34 (A), the sixth round is started with the lower entry control solenoid 463 turned on and the lower prize winning device 433 taking an approach allowable posture, and FIG. 35 (B). As shown in the above, during the sixth round, the game ball can enter the lower prize opening 433A. Further, from the start of the sixth round until a certain period (for example, 3.0 seconds) elapses, the switching solenoid 465 is turned on, the distribution mechanism 601 is set to the guided posture, and the game ball enters the specific passage TA. It will be possible.

Here, in the sixth round, the switching solenoid 465 is set to include a period after the shortest approachable time, and in a fixed period (3.0 seconds) slightly before and after the shortest approachable time. It is turned on. Therefore, if the game ball continues to be fired before the end of the fifth round, the game ball that follows after the last entry into the upper prize opening 434A in the fifth round proceeds toward the specific passage TA and is specified. Detected by aisle switch 448. The lower approach restricting solenoid 463 and the switching solenoid 465 generate an enterable period in a state where the game ball can enter at least the specific passage TA after the shortest approachable time, thereby causing a "16R jackpot (V prize)". ], A game ball enters the specific passage TA and a V prize is generated.

Further, in the sixth round, the lower entry restricting solenoid 463 and the switching solenoid 465 operate, and the game ball is in a state where the game ball can enter the specific passage TA from the lower prize winning device 433 (hereinafter, the accessible formation period). The length (3.0 seconds) is set shorter than the time (6.0 seconds) obtained by multiplying the allowable number of entries (10 pieces) into the upper prize opening 434A in the fifth round by the firing time interval. ing. As a result, a period in which the game ball does not advance to the specific passage TA side during the flow impossibility period in the fifth round is generated, and during the period during which the game ball does not advance to the specific passage TA side due to this flow impossibility period, "16R". In "Big hit (V non-winning)", an enterable formation period is generated. Therefore, in the situation where the entrances of the lower prize opening 433A and the specific passage TA are open in the "16R jackpot (V non-winning)", the game ball does not reach the entrance of the lower prize entrance 433A and goes to the specific passage TA. Can make the game ball inaccessible. Therefore, it is necessary to set the non-flowable period in the fifth round sufficiently longer than the length of the enterable formation period in consideration of the variation in the flow time of the game ball, which is twice the firing time interval of the game ball. It is preferable to set it longer than (0.6 seconds), and it is preferable to set it longer than 4 times (2.4 seconds).

When a certain period (3.0 seconds) as the enterable formation period elapses from the start of the sixth round, the switching solenoid 465 is turned off while the lower entry control solenoid 463 remains on, and the approachable period ends. The game ball that has entered the lower prize opening 433A is guided to the non-specific passage TB (see FIG. 35 (C)), and is detected by the non-specific passage switch 447. The winning of the game ball to the lower prize opening 433A is detected by the lower prize switch 443 (see FIG. 10) provided near the entrance of the lower prize opening 433A, and the number of game balls allowed to enter (8) is lower. The sixth round ends when the player enters the grand prize opening 433A or when the maximum allowable entry time has elapsed from the start of the round.

After the 7th round, the upper prize-winning device 434 takes an entry-allowed posture again (see Fig. 33), and as in the 1st to 4th rounds, a predetermined number of game balls (8) win a prize. Each round ends when it is detected by the switch 443 or when the maximum allowable approach time elapses from the start of the round.

In the "16R jackpot (V winning)", the round progresses to the final round (16th round), and in the 16th round, the special gaming state ends when the number of game balls allowed to enter (8 balls) enters the upper prize winning device 434. do. In the special game state of "16R jackpot (V prize)", if the game ball continues to be launched by the right-handed game method during the special game state, the game ball will surely enter the specific passage TA, and the game ball will always enter the specific passage TA. The probability of being able to enter is 100%. After the end of the special gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state is started because the gaming ball enters the specific passage TA and the V prize is generated during the special gaming state.

The "16R jackpot (V non-winning)" differs from the "16R jackpot (V winning)" only in the interval time from the end of the 5th round to the start of the 6th round, and the lower jackpot winning device 433 and the upper jackpot winning device 434. As for other conditions such as the opening pattern (continuous opening) and the round end condition, the special gaming state progresses according to the same conditions. Therefore, in the following, only the difference between "16R jackpot (V winning)" and "16R jackpot (V non-winning)" will be described. Regarding the operation of the upper entry control solenoid 464 and the detection timing of the game ball by the upper prize winning switch 444 from the 5th round to the 6th round, "16R jackpot (V non-winning)" and "16R jackpot (V winning)" In FIG. 34 (B), the illustration is omitted because it is common to the above.

In the "16R jackpot (V non-winning)", as shown in FIG. 34 (B), the sixth round starts after a short short interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the fifth round. The switching solenoid 465 is turned on and the distribution mechanism 601 enters the entrance of the specific passage TA until a certain time (3.0 seconds) elapses from the start of the lower prize winning device 433. It is considered to be an open guidance posture.

In the "16R jackpot (V non-winning)", the game ball that has flowed down in front of the upper prize winning device 434 after the end of the 5th round has passed the shortest flow time (3.6 seconds) from the end of the 5th round (3.6 seconds). The position where the distribution mechanism 601 is provided will not be reached until after the shortest time that the entry is possible). The period during which the distribution mechanism 601 takes the guided posture is a fixed time (3.0 seconds) from the start of the sixth round, as in the case of "16R jackpot (V prize)", and even if this time is set, "16R" In the "big hit (V non-winning)", the time length of the short interval is set so that the switching solenoid 465 is turned off at a timing earlier than the shortest time when the player can enter. Therefore, after the end of the fifth round, when the game ball enters the lower prize winning device 433 and reaches the distribution mechanism 601, the entrance of the specific passage TA is closed (see FIG. 35 (C)), and the game is played. The sphere is guided to the non-specific passage TB.

In the "16R jackpot (V non-winning)", the round progresses to the final round, and when the allowable number of game balls enters the upper jackpot winning device 434, the special gaming state ends. In the "16R jackpot (V non-winning)", the probability that the game ball cannot enter the specific passage TA during the special game state and the game ball can enter the specific passage TA is 0%. When the special gaming state ends, the time-saving gaming state, which is less valuable to the player than the probabilistic gaming state, is started because the game ball has not entered the specific passage TA during the special gaming state.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100, when the winning conditions for winning the big hit lottery are satisfied, a special gaming state in which a plurality of (16) rounds are combined occurs, and a specific round (sixth) in the special gaming state is generated. When the gaming ball enters the specific passage TA in the round), a more advantageous probabilistic gaming state occurs than when the gaming ball does not enter the specific passage TA, and the occurrence of this probabilistic gaming state is controlled by the main control board 920. It is controlled by the difference in interval time. Therefore, the control pattern for permitting the entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA for a plurality of types of special gaming states can be shared except for the interval time, so that the control can be simplified and the specific passage can be simplified. The probability of a game ball entering the TA can be easily different. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the probability of the game ball entering the specific passage TA, which affects the transition of the game state, while suppressing the cost increase of the pachinko machine 100.

Further, in the specific round (sixth round), the upper prize winning device 434 is provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism 601 that can take a guidance posture in which the entrance to the specific passage TA is opened, and immediately before the specific round. In the round (fifth round), the game ball whose traveling direction is controlled by the upper prize winning device 434 has a fixed number (8) of detection units (predetermined area) of the upper prize switch 444 provided inside the upper prize opening 434A. After passing through, the end condition of the immediately preceding round is satisfied, and then the distribution mechanism 601 is controlled to the guided posture to start the specific round. Therefore, in the round immediately before the specific round, the flow of the game ball on the right flow path KR leading to the specific passage TA can be controlled by the operation of the upper prize winning device 434, and the distribution mechanism 601 and the lower prize in the specific round can be controlled. Even if the operation control of the device 433 is the same, the probability that the game ball enters the specific passage TA can be made different by changing the length of the interval time (standby time) before the start of the specific round.

Further, when the sixth round as a specific round is started, the distribution mechanism 601 is straddled from before the timing when the game ball arrives at the distribution mechanism 601 which is in an approachable state in the specific round and after the timing. As a control for continuing the firing of the game ball so as to be reachable, the permissible number of entries in the fifth round is set to a different number from the previous rounds. When the main control board 920 controls to make the allowable number of approaches different, when a specific round is started, before the timing when the game ball reaches the distribution mechanism 601 which is in an approachable state in the specific round. Therefore, it is possible to easily continue the firing of the game ball so as to reach the distribution mechanism 601 straddling after the timing. For this reason, the player intentionally stops the launch of the game ball at the timing when it is necessary to continue the launch of the game ball in the special game state, and the game is performed on the distribution mechanism 601 which is in an approachable state in a specific round. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball does not reach and the player suffers a disadvantage.

In addition, in order to continue firing the game ball so that it can reach the distribution mechanism 601 from before the timing when the game ball arrives at the distribution mechanism 601 which is in an approachable state in a specific round and after the timing. The control is not limited to the configuration in which the permissible number of entries in the fifth round is different from that in the previous rounds, but is realized in place of or by other controls in addition to the control in which the permissible number of entries is different. You may. For example, the interval time before the execution of the immediately preceding round (fifth round) immediately before the specific round (sixth round) is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the time is compared with the short time. Therefore, a special gaming state may be generated in which the interval time before the execution of one or a plurality of rounds executed before the immediately preceding round is set to a long time (for example, 2 seconds). As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is little possibility that the game ball is wasted even if the game ball is continuously fired, and it is possible to facilitate the continuous launch of the game ball. In this case, it is preferable that the short interval time set as the immediately preceding round is set to a time shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball because wasteful consumption of the game ball can be efficiently suppressed. ..

In addition, in order to continue firing the game ball so that it can reach the distribution mechanism 601 from before the timing when the game ball arrives at the distribution mechanism 601 which is in an approachable state in a specific round and after the timing. As a control, for the special game state that generates a specific round, the progress content of the special game state is common until the middle of the immediately preceding round, and the player can play the game by continuing the firing of the game ball for a long time in the immediately preceding round. You may want to generate another kind of special gaming state that can be worth it. For example, for "16R jackpot (V winning)", the winning device operates according to the same operation pattern and operation end condition as the specific round until the middle of the round immediately before the specific round, and in the round immediately before that, "16R jackpot". (V prize) ”has a larger number of entry allowances so that more game balls can enter the prize device, or the maximum entry allowance time in“ 16R jackpot (V prize) ”is shorter (for example, 4.2 seconds). ), A special gaming state in which a maximum permissible approach time (for example, 6.0 seconds) longer than that time is set may be generated.

Next, a case where a power failure occurs in a specific round of the special gaming state will be described. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a ball transport device 602 on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism 601 capable of generating an accessible state in which a game ball can enter the specific passage TA. When a power failure occurs, the ball transport device 602 holds the game ball flowing down the transport passage KT as a flow path leading to the specific passage TA in the transport passage KT as a predetermined range. It has a function.

Specifically, the transfer motor 624 operates at a constant speed under the control of the main control board 920, and when a power failure occurs, the power supply to the transfer motor 624 is stopped and the transfer motor 624 is stopped. A power failure occurred in a situation where the game ball that was supposed to pass through the specific passage TA is flowing down the flow path (transport passage KT) leading to the specific passage TA (that is, within the interval time from the 5th round to the 6th round). In the case, the game ball can be held in the transport passage KT by the ball transport device 602.

After the pachinko machine 100 is restored to power, the control of the special gaming state by the main control board 920 progresses and the control before the power failure is restarted, and the game ball flows down toward the specific passage TA according to the progress of the control. Is restarted. Therefore, in the special gaming state of the 16R jackpot (V winning), it is possible to generate a situation in which the gaming ball enters the specific passage TA, as in the case where the power failure does not occur. That is, if a power failure occurs within the interval time from the 5th round to the 6th round, if there is no ball holding function at the time of a power failure, even if the game ball is fired in a hurry after the power is restored, it will reach the entrance of the specific passage TA. Although the specific passage TA cannot enter in time before, such a situation can be avoided by holding the game ball in the transport passage KT by the ball holding function at the time of a power failure. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a player who has legitimately played a game due to an unforeseen situation suffers a disadvantage.

Further, the ball transport device 602 can hold the game ball at a plurality of places where the ball transport unit 623 can support the game ball along the transport passage KT in the transport passage KT as a flow path leading to the specific passage TA. The game ball can be held at a plurality of places in the transport passage KT. Therefore, when a power failure occurs at a timing when some of the game balls held in the transport passage KT can enter the specific passage TA, the game balls are held at a plurality of locations in the transport passage KT and specified before the power failure. The game ball that was able to enter the passage TA can be made to enter the specific passage TA, and the other game balls can be prevented from entering the specific passage. In addition, in the special game state of 16R jackpot (V non-winning), the flow of the game ball can be prevented at the uppermost stream end of the transport passage KT, so that the game ball can be prevented from flowing down in the middle of the short interval from the 5th round to the 6th round. In the event of a power outage, the game ball is held on the upstream side sufficiently separated from the specific aisle TA so that the game ball does not reach the specific aisle TA in a situation where the specific aisle TA is in an accessible state. can do. In this way, the situation of whether or not the game ball flows down to the specific passage TA corresponding to the transition control of the game state determined before the power failure is saved in the game area, and the flow of the game ball is restored after the power is restored. It can be made easier.

Further, on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism 601, an upper prize winning device 434 that can switch whether or not to advance the game ball to the specific passage TA side is provided, and the ball transport device 602 is from the upper prize winning device 434. The game ball is held in the transport passage KT located on the downstream side and upstream of the distribution mechanism 601. Therefore, the game ball heading to the specific passage TA can be efficiently held during the power failure only for the game ball that has flowed down to the distribution mechanism 601 side by the upper prize winning device 434, and the game state determined before the power failure can be held. It is possible to efficiently restore the flow of the game ball corresponding to the transition control of the above after a power failure. Here, if the game ball is held on the upstream side of the upper prize winning device 434, the game ball is stopped on the right flow path KR including the game ball that will enter the upper prize winning device 434. Will be made to. If a game ball that is not involved in the entry of the specific passage TA is held in the game area during a power failure, the possibility of unexpected fraudulent activity increases. Therefore, in order to exert the ball holding function only for the minimum necessary game ball, it is preferable to provide the ball holding function at the time of a power failure on the downstream side of the upper prize winning device 434.

In addition, the ball transfer device 602 exerts a ball holding function at the time of a power failure even in a special gaming state where it should not enter the specific passage TA, saves the situation before the power failure, and enters the game ball into the specific passage TA after the power failure. It can be disabled. In this case, it is preferable to provide an fraud prevention function so that the position where the game ball is held is not illegally moved. For example, the front cover 612 is provided as a part of the base 611 of the winning device unit 600. By covering the transport passage KT, unauthorized contact for moving the holding position of the game ball is prevented.

As a fraud prevention function, another configuration may be provided in place of the front cover 612 or in addition to the front cover 612. For example, the belt 621 is rotated by a sensor that detects the rotation position of the belt 621. The position is backed up in the event of a power failure, and control is performed to confirm the position of the belt 621 in the process of starting up after power recovery. A predetermined process exemplified in the process of adding a certain penalty such as invalidating the above may be performed by the main control board 920 as a fraud prevention function.

Further, the ball holding function during a power failure has a ball holding function for holding the game ball not only on the upstream side of the lower prize winning device 433 but also on the downstream side closer to the distribution mechanism 601 than the entrance of the lower prize winning device 433. In this case, the situation before the power failure can be saved in more detail and restored after the power is restored, which is preferable.

Next, the control regarding the entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA when a predetermined firing abnormality state occurs in the special game state will be described. The pachinko machine 100 determines whether or not the pachinko machine 100 is in an abnormal firing state in which an abnormality has occurred in the launch of the gaming ball by the launching device 330 in the special gaming state of 16R jackpot (V prize) in which the gaming ball can enter the specific passage TA. Control to stop the progress of the game by pausing the special game state when it is detected and a launch abnormal state is detected, and then to proceed with the game that stopped the progress when the launch abnormal state is canceled. An abnormality response control function is provided.

Specifically, as an abnormality response control function, the game board 400 is provided with a right-handed detection switch 603 on the upstream side portion of the game area, as shown in FIG. 7. The right-handed detection switch 603 is provided at a position where all the game balls that the game ball will pass through by the right-handed game technique executed in the special game state can be detected. The right-handed detection switch 603 is composed of a non-contact type sensor that detects the passage of the game ball, and is connected to the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10).

Further, the main control board 920 is provided with a timer update process S1210 of the main control board 920, a process S1309 for accepting the upper prize, and a process S1310 for prohibiting the upper prize, as each process as an abnormality response control function. , These processes are stored in ROM (not shown) as a part of the control program of the main control board 920. Hereinafter, the abnormality response control by the main control board 920 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer update process S1210 of the main control board 920. In the timer update process S1210, it is determined whether or not the pause flag is set (S2001), and if the pause flag is not set (S2001: N), a process of updating the special symbol-related control timer is executed. (S2002). On the other hand, if the pause flag is not set, the process shifts to S2003 without updating the special symbol-related control timer. In the process of S2003, timers other than the special symbol-related control timer are updated, and the timer update process is terminated.

Here, the pause flag is set when the game ball is not normally launched by the right-handed game method at the timing that affects whether or not the game ball can enter the specific area in the specific round including the specific round. This flag is turned on, and is composed of a part of the RAM of the main control board 920. Switching the pause flag on and off will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing S1309 in which the upper prize is allowed on the main control board 920, and FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing S1310 in which the upper prize is prohibited on the main control board 920. The upper prize-acceptable processing S1309 and the upper-ranking prize-prohibited processing S1310 are stored in the ROM of the main control board 920 as a part of the processing of the special symbol-related processing S1217 constituting a part of the main control interrupt processing (see FIG. 12). It is remembered.

The processing S1309 during which the upper prize is allowed is a processing for generating a special gaming state, and the round start in which the upper entry control mechanism 454 takes an entry allowable posture so that the game ball can enter the upper prize opening 434A. It is executed in the situation from the timing to the end of the round. Further, the large prize-allowing process S1309 is set to start at the end of the process corresponding to the opening period by the large prize device operation start process S1306 (see FIG. 18), and the first round is started. Further, in the upper prize-allowing processing S1309, after the operation of the lower prize-winning device 433 or the upper prize-winning device 434 is prohibited by the lower-rank prize-prohibited process S1308 or the upper-rank prize-prohibited process S1310 (see FIG. 18). Even if the interval time has elapsed in the situation of, the start setting is made when the next round is started. The setting of the start of the upper prize-allowed processing S1309 is the special symbol-related process referred to in the special symbol-related process S1217 in the grand prize device operation start process S1306, the lower prize-prohibited process S1308 or the upper prize-prohibited process S1310. This is done by updating the value of the state identification value.

In the processing S1309 in which the upper prize is allowed, first, it is determined whether or not the pause flag is set (S2101), and if the pause flag is not set (S2101: N), the flag before the specific round is set. It is determined whether or not the flag is set (S2102). The pre-specific round flag affects whether or not the game ball can enter the specific passage TA during a certain period including a part of the specific round (sixth round) in which the distribution mechanism 601 operates and the entrance of the specific passage TA is opened. It is a flag set (turned on) at the timing (hereinafter referred to as a specific passage side progress period), and is composed of a part of the RAM of the main control board 920.

In the process of S2102, if the flag before the specific round is not set (S2102: N), the situation is still before or after the specific passage side progress period. In this case, it is determined whether or not it is the immediately preceding round (fifth round) of the specific round (S2103), and if it is the immediately preceding round (S2103: Y), the allowable number of entries in the round is "3". (S2104). In the immediately preceding round, the game ball launched after the allowable number of approaches is "3" is a game ball that may be able to enter the specific passage TA in the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game ball is entered. The flag before a specific round is set at the timing when the allowable number becomes "3".

In the process of S2104, when the allowable number of approaches is determined to be "3" (S2104: Y), the pre-specific round flag is set and the process shifts to S2115. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2103 that it is not the round immediately preceding the specific round (S2103: N), or in the processing of S2104, it is determined that the number of permissible entries is still "4" or more even though it is the round immediately preceding the specific round. If this is done (S2104: N), the process of S2105 is skipped and the process is transferred to S2115.

In the process of S2102, when it is determined that the flag before a specific round is set (S2102: Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the right-handed detection switch 603 (S2106), and right-handed. If the game ball has passed through the detection switch 603 (S2106: Y), the firing stop time measurement counter is reset (S2107). The launch stop time measurement counter is a counter for measuring the time during which the game ball does not flow down the right flow path KR during the specific passage side progress period, and is composed of a part of the RAM of the main control board 920. ..

In the process of S2106, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the right-handed detection switch 603 (S2106: N), the firing stop time measurement counter is incremented and updated by "1" (S2108). The upper prize-acceptable process S1309 is executed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, and is executed at regular time intervals (2 ms). Therefore, in the situation where the right flow path KR is not flowed down during the specific passage side progress period, the launch stop time measurement counter is incremented and updated by "1" every 2 ms.

After the processing of S2108, it is determined whether or not the firing stop time measurement counter has reached a value (“3000 or more”) corresponding to the absence of passage of the game ball for 6.0 seconds or longer as a firing abnormal state (S2109), 6 When it is determined that there is no passage for 0 seconds or more (S2109: Y), the pause flag is set (S2110), the operation of the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is canceled, and the game ball cannot enter the upper prize opening 434A. (S2111). As a result, preparations for suspending the progress of the special gaming state in the round immediately preceding the specific round are completed. In the situation where the pause flag is set, as described above, the timer update process S1210 skips the update process of the special symbol-related control timer, and the special symbol-related control timer is maintained at the same value. The progress of the special game state will be suspended.

When it is determined in the process of S2101 that the pause flag is set (S2101: Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the right-handed detection switch 603 (S2112). In the process of S2112, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the right-handed detection switch 603 (S2112: N), the processes of S2113 and S2114 are skipped, and the process shifts to S2115.

In the process of S2112, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the right-handed detection switch 603 (S2112: Y), the process of canceling (turning off) the pause flag is executed (S2113), and further, the above. After the entry restriction solenoid 464 is returned to the operating state and the game ball can enter the upper prize opening 434A (S2114), the process shifts to S2115. Here, when the game ball passes through the right-handed detection switch 603 in the situation where the pause flag is set, the firing abnormal state is canceled. In this case, the processing of S2113 and S2114 is performed. The execution resumes the progress of the special gaming state that was paused in the round immediately before the specific round.

In the process after S2115, first, the entry allowance number update process S2115 for updating the entry allowance number is executed. In this entry allowable number update process S2115, a counter corresponding to the entry allowable number (a part of the RAM of the main control board 920) is performed at the timing when the upper prize winning switch 444 detects the entry of the game ball into the upper prize opening 434A. The value of is updated to the value obtained by subtracting the winning amount of one ball.

After the processing of S2115, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the special symbol-related control timer is released (S2116). The special symbol-related control timer is set with a value corresponding to the time length of each round and interval before the start of each round and interval, and is updated (for example, subtracted) in the timer update process until the time elapses. It is a timer to be updated), and is composed of a part of the RAM of the main control board 920.

In the process of S2116, if the special symbol-related control timer is canceled (S2116: Y), the maximum approach allowable time has elapsed in the running round, so the operation of the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is canceled. After executing the round end setting process (S2118) for prohibiting the entry of the game ball into the upper prize winning device 434 and setting the transition to the next period, the upper prize winning process S1309 is terminated.

In the process of S2116, if the special symbol-related control timer is not canceled (S2116: N), it is determined whether or not the allowed number of entries in the running round is "0" (S2117), and "0" is determined. If there is (S2117: Y), it is the timing of the end of the round, so the process proceeds to the round end setting process (S2118). If the permissible number of entries is "1" or more in the processing of S2115 (S2117: N), it is the timing to continue the round that is still being executed. Exit S1309.

Here, in the round end setting process S2118, if the next round remains in the special game state and the end of the first round to the fifteenth round, the value of the special symbol-related state identification value is the process during which the upper prize is prohibited. The value is updated to the value "7" corresponding to S1310, and the setting for shifting to the interval time is made (see FIG. 18). On the other hand, at the end of the 16th round, the value of the special symbol-related state identification value is updated to the value "8" corresponding to the large prize device operation stop processing S1311 (see FIG. 18) for shifting to the ending period. To. Further, in the round end setting process S2118, the value of the special symbol-related control timer is set to a value corresponding to the length of the interval time or the ending period. Immediately before a specific round, for setting interval times having different lengths corresponding to a plurality of types of special gaming states, refer to the stop symbol identification value corresponding to the type of special gaming state in this round end setting process S2118. It will be done.

The processing S1310 during which the upper prize is prohibited is a process executed during the interval time after the operation of the upper prize winning device 434 is prohibited, and is between the fifth round and the sixth round corresponding immediately before the specific round. This is a process that is executed during the interval period.

In the process S1310 during which the upper prize is prohibited, first, as shown in FIG. 38, it is determined whether or not the pause flag is set (S2201), and if the pause flag is not set (S2201: N). , It is determined whether or not the flag before a specific round is set (S2202). Since the flag before the specific round is turned on when the processing S1309 in which the upper prize is allowed is executed in the round (fifth round) immediately before the specific round (the sixth round), the flag before the specific round is set. Is the interval period immediately before the specific round (hereinafter, also referred to as the immediately preceding interval period), and if it is not set, it is another interval period.

In the process of S2202, if the flag before a specific round is not set (S2202: N), it is not the immediately preceding interval period, so each process of S2203 to S2211 required for the immediately preceding interval period is skipped and the process is transferred to S2231. ..

In the process of S2202, if the flag before a specific round is set (S2202: Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the right-handed detection switch 603 (S2203), and the right-handed detection switch 603 is set to the game ball. If has passed (S2203: Y), the firing stop time measurement counter is reset, and then the process shifts to S2208.

In the process of S2203, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the right-handed detection switch 603 (S2203: N), the firing stop time measurement counter is incremented and updated by "1" (S2205), and the update thereof is performed. The subsequent launch stop time measurement counter determines whether or not the game ball has passed for 6.0 seconds or longer (S2206), and if it is determined that the game ball has not passed for 6.0 seconds or longer (S2206: Y), it is paused. The flag is set (S2207), and the process is transferred to S2208.

In the process of S2208, it is determined whether or not the interval time measurement counter has a value corresponding to 1.0 second or more (S2208). The interval time measurement counter is a counter for measuring the elapsed time since the start of the immediately preceding interval, and is composed of a part of the RAM of the main control board 920.

In the processing of S2208, if the interval time measurement counter does not have a value corresponding to 1.0 second or more (S2208: N), the situation is not 1.0 second or more but less than 1.0 second after the start of the immediately preceding interval. be. In this case, the interval time measurement counter is updated (for example, "1" is added and updated) (S2209), and the process shifts to S2231.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2208, if the interval time measurement counter has a value corresponding to 1.0 second or more (S2208: Y), it means that 1.0 second or more has elapsed since the start of the immediately preceding interval. In this case, the interval measurement counter is reset (S2210), the pre-specific round flag is released (S2211), and the process shifts to S2231.

When it is determined in the process of S2201 that the pause flag is set (S2201: Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the right-handed detection switch 603 (S2221). If it is determined in the process of S2221 that the game ball has not passed through the right-handed detection switch 603 (S2221: N), the process of S2222 is skipped and the process shifts to S2231.

In the process of S2221, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the right-handed detection switch 603 (S2221: Y), the process of canceling the pause flag (turning it off) is executed (S2222), and the process is S2221. Move to.

In the process of S2231, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the special symbol-related control timer is canceled (S2231), and if the special symbol-related control timer is not canceled (S2231: N), the interval period is continued. Therefore, the process of S2232 is skipped, and the process S1310 during which the upper prize is prohibited is terminated.

In the process of S2231, when it is determined that the special symbol-related control timer is canceled (S2231: Y), it is the timing when the interval ends and the next round is started, so that the next round is started. After executing the round start setting process for setting the transition (S2322), the process S1310 during which the upper prize is prohibited is terminated.

Here, the operation of the pachinko machine 100 when an abnormal firing state occurs will be described. In the pachinko machine 100, if a situation occurs in which the game ball cannot be launched during the special game state of 16R jackpot (V prize), the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA and should occur after the special game state. Players will not be able to receive the benefits of the probabilistic gaming status. The abnormal launch state of the gaming ball can occur under various conditions such as clogging of the ball at the entrance portion of the gaming area, failure of the launching device 330, or trouble in supplying the gaming ball to the pachinko machine 100. In the situation where this kind of abnormal firing state occurs, if there is an enterable period during which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA, the probability change game state obtained by winning the lottery related to the special symbol of the corner will be entered. The opportunity to enjoy the game value of the transition is invalidated, and the player may suffer a disadvantage.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, after the round immediately before the specific round in the special gaming state is started, when the remaining time of the round reaches the timing when the allowable number of approaches becomes "3", The pre-specific round flag is set. When the flag before a specific round is set, the flow of the game ball on the right side flow path KR is monitored by checking the status of the right-handed detection switch 603 in the processing S1309 in which the upper prize is allowed and the processing S1310 in which the upper prize is prohibited. (Processing of S2106 and S2203).

If the right-handed detection switch 603 does not detect the passage of the game ball for a certain period of time (6.0 seconds) or more in the situation where the flag before the specific round is set, the pause flag is set and the special game state is set. Progress is stopped. The progress / stop of the special gaming state is performed by not executing the update process of the special symbol-related control timer, but canceling the operation while the upper approach restricting solenoid 464 is operating (S2111).

The situation in which the pause flag is set is canceled when it is detected that the game ball passes through the right-handed detection switch 603. As a result, the progress of the special gaming state is restarted in the situation where the launch of the gaming ball is executed again. In the round immediately before the specific round and the interval immediately before that, the special game state can be paused by setting the pause flag, and the game ball does not go to the specific passage TA at the start of the specific round. It becomes difficult to do.

As described above, when the special gaming state of the 16R jackpot (V winning) occurs and the gaming ball is not normally launched and becomes a firing abnormal state, the progress of at least a part of the game is stopped. For this reason, it is easy to avoid the situation where the game ball is not launched during the approachable period during which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA, and it is easy to avoid the situation where the player who is playing the game legitimately suffers a disadvantage. be able to.

Further, the right-handed detection switch 603 for detecting the firing abnormality state is a part of the game area and is provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism 601 and the upper prize winning device 434. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately detect a situation in which the game ball is not flowing down to the distribution mechanism 601 side, and when an abnormal firing state occurs, appropriately execute control corresponding to the state.

In addition, when a firing abnormality occurs in the round immediately before a specific round, even if the game ball does not flow down the right side flow path KR, the operation of the upper entry control solenoid 464 is canceled and the upper prize is won. Prevent the game ball from entering the mouth 434A. For this reason, the occurrence of an advantageous state for the player can be paused visually, which causes a misunderstanding that the advantageous state in which the winning condition is more likely to be satisfied has occurred for a long time compared to other players. Without this, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a player who has been playing a game legitimately suffers a disadvantage.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the player has a firing operation, the right-handed detection switch 603 determines that the game ball does not pass through the game area for a certain period of time, so that the player who is unfamiliar with the game is unprepared. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the firing operation is stopped and a disadvantage is incurred.

Next, an unjust entry suppression function for preventing the game ball from unreasonably entering the specific passage TA in the special gaming state of the 16R jackpot (V non-winning) will be described. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with a ball transport device 602 on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism 601 capable of generating an approachable state in which a game ball can enter the specific passage TA. In the event of a power failure, the ball transport device 602 holds the game ball flowing down the transport passage KT as a flow path leading to the specific passage TA in the transport passage KT as a predetermined range. It exerts an unjust entry suppression function that suppresses the entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA in the special gaming state of the 16R jackpot (V non-winning).

Specifically, if the main control board 920 temporarily loses power during the short interval of the 16R jackpot (V non-winning), the game ball flowing down the transport passage KT goes to the specific passage TA. Stay on the spot without approaching. If the transport passage KT is a downwardly sloping passage that approaches the specific passage TA due to the weight of the game ball, the game ball approaches the specific passage TA during the period of power failure, and after the power is restored, it is short. A situation may occur in which the game ball enters the specific passage TA despite the passage through the interval.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in order for the game ball to go to the specific passage TA via the transport passage KT, it is essential to energize the ball transport device 602. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball unreasonably enters the specific passage TA due to a power failure occurring during the special game state of the 16R jackpot (V non-winning).

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment different from the above embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as the first embodiment) will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, the upper prize winning device 434, the distribution mechanism 601 and the ball transfer device 602 are used to perform a specific round in which an accessible state capable of entering the specific passage TA is generated. Realized a special game state including. In the second embodiment, the ball transfer device 602 is not provided, and the game ball can enter the specific passage TA by a mechanism that allows the game ball to flow down by its own weight between the upper prize winning device 434 and the distribution mechanism 601. It is configured to generate a specific round.

FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating the game board 1400 according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 39, for the sake of easy understanding, the lower entry control mechanism 1453 in the approach allowable posture and the distribution mechanism 1601 in the guided posture are shown by a alternate long and short dash line. In the following description of the second embodiment, only the parts that are different from the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment will be described.

Two large winning devices 1433 and 1434 are provided on the right side flow path KR of the front right side portion of the game board 1400, separated from the upstream side and the downstream side. An upper prize winning device 1434 having the same configuration as the upper prize winning device 434 according to the above embodiment is provided on the upper front portion of the game board 1400, and the lower right portion on the front surface of the game board 1400 is the above embodiment. A lower prize winning device 1433 having the same configuration as the lower prize winning device 433 and having a specific passage TA set inside is provided. The upper and lower prize-winning devices 1433 and 1434 are provided with upper and lower entry control mechanisms 1453 and 1454 that take an entry prohibition posture and an entry allowable posture so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, respectively. The entry control solenoid that changes the speed is controlled by the main control device 370 (main control board 920). As a result, the game balls can be made to enter the upper and lower winning openings 1433A and 1434A as the respective entrance portions for each of the large winning devices 1433 and 1434.

Inside the lower prize winning device 1433 (lower grand prize opening 1433A), a distribution mechanism 1601 having the same configuration as the distribution mechanism 601 according to the above embodiment is provided. Further, a starting device 1436 and a right starting winning device 1432 are provided on the upstream side portion and the downstream side portion along the right side flow path KR in which the upper and lower winning openings 1433A and 1434A are arranged. The starting device 1436 has the same configuration as the starting device 436 according to the above embodiment, and the right starting winning device 1432 is configured to operate so that the game ball can enter the rear side of the game area. It is different from the right start winning device 432 according to the embodiment.

In the connection passage KD corresponding to the passage portion between the upper and lower winning openings 1433A and 1434A provided in the upper and lower large winning devices 1433 and 1434, the game ball passing through the front side of the upper large winning opening 1434A becomes the lower large winning opening 1433A. It is configured so that a certain time or more (in this modified example, the shortest flow time set to 3.0 seconds) elapses before reaching. The connection passage KD is provided with a flow delay portion 1435 that delays the flow of the game ball. The flow delay portion 1435 is formed by bending left and right, and the bottom surface of the flow path of the game ball is formed with a gentle downward slope (for example, 10 degrees or less).

An outlet 1438 through which a game ball can enter is provided on the lower left side of the upper prize winning device 1434. The discharge port 1438 is an entrance portion of a collection / discharge passage in which a game ball that has entered the game area is discharged to the outside without winning a prize. The game ball that is off to the left side of the front view in the peripheral portion of the upper prize winning device 1434 and above the peripheral portion is configured to enter the discharge port 1438. For this reason, in the situation where the game is played by the right-handed game method, the probability that the game ball will win the upper prize opening 1434A that can enter is set to be not 100%, and the lower prize opening 1433A is won through the flow delay portion 1435. The probability is also set to not be 100%. With this setting, when the right-handed game method is used, the game ball enters (wins) the upper prize opening 1434A with a probability of approximately 99% or more in the situation where the game ball can enter the upper prize opening 1434A. In addition, in the situation where the game ball cannot enter the upper prize opening 1434A, the game ball flows down the flow delay part 1435 with a probability of about 99% or more, and in the situation where the game ball can enter the lower prize opening 1433A, it is omitted. It is preferable to set the game ball to enter (win) the lower prize opening 1433A with a probability of 99% or more.

In a situation where the upper and lower large winning devices 1433 and 1434 are in an entry prohibited posture (upper and lower entry prohibited state), the upper and lower winning openings 1433A and 1434A are closed so as not to be able to enter. In the vertical entry prohibited state, as shown in FIG. 39 (A), the game ball launched on the right side of the game area passes through the front side of the upper prize opening 1434A and flows down to the downstream side. Then, the game ball moves downward while moving back and forth through the flow delay portion 1435, passes through the entrance portion of the lower prize winning opening 1433A, and flows down to the downstream side.

In the situation where the upper prize-winning device 1434 is in the admissible posture (upper admissible state), as shown in FIG. 39 (B), the opening / closing plate portion constituting the entry control mechanism 1454 is tilted forward from the upright posture. Protrude into the game area. As a result, the game ball enters the upper prize opening 1434A that opens to the rear side of the game area, the flow of the game ball to the downstream side is prevented, and the game ball completely advances to the side where the lower prize opening 1433A is provided. It becomes a state where it does not flow (a state where it cannot flow down). When the inability to flow continues for a certain period of time or longer, the game ball does not exist at all in the connection passage KD corresponding to the portion between the upper and lower winning openings 1433A and 1434A.

When the upper prize-winning device 1434 shifts to the entry-prohibited posture after the upper entrance allowance state continues for a certain period of time, the game ball passes through the front side of the upper prize-winning opening 1434A and begins to flow down to the downstream side. The game ball reaches the lower prize opening 1433A after the shortest flow time has elapsed after the upper prize winning device 1434 shifts to the no-entry posture. Therefore, even if the lower-ranking prize device 1433 takes the entry-allowing posture, the game ball cannot enter the lower-ranking winning opening 1433A before the shortest flow time elapses even after the upper-side entry allowance state ends, and the shortest. After the flow time has elapsed, the game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 1433.

In the situation where the lower entrance prize device 1433 is in the lower entry allowable posture (lower entry allowable state), as shown in FIG. 39 (C), the opening / closing plate portion constituting the lower entry regulation mechanism 1453 protrudes forward from the posture. Immerse yourself in the rear side and store it in the rear side of the game area. As a result, the game ball can enter the lower prize opening 1433A that opens on the upper side.

The upper and lower prize-winning devices 1433 and 1434 and the distribution mechanism 1601 according to the present modification are the main control boards as in the control for the upper and lower prize-winning devices 433 and 434 and the distribution mechanism 601 according to the above-described embodiment. The operation is controlled by 920. As a result, the special gaming state in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA in the specific round (sixth round) and the interval time immediately before the specific round are different from the special gaming state, and the game ball enters the specific passage TA. It is possible to generate a special gaming state in which the player cannot enter.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball by intermittently projecting from the back side of the path into the path at a plurality of locations on the right side flow path KR and inside the lower grand prize device 1433 (lower grand prize opening 1433A). Projecting pieces S1 to S5 are provided. The movable protrusion pieces S1 to S5 are operated by the control of the main control board 920, and can be operated by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown) that exits the path in the ON state. The movable projecting pieces S1 to S5 operate at a cycle equal to or less than the firing time interval of the game balls (for example, 0.55 seconds), and have a ball interval generation function of causing the game balls to flow down one by one in a state of being separated to the downstream side. I have. As a result, the game balls interfere with each other while the game balls are flowing down due to their own weight in the flow delay portion 1435, and the game balls cannot flow down to the downstream side, or the flow delay portion 1435 is extremely slowly flown down. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will flow down, and the game ball can be made to flow down to the specific passage TA at an appropriate timing. During a power failure, the movable projecting pieces S1 to S5 exit from the flow path of the game ball, and the game ball flows down to the downstream side.

Here, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, an unjust entry suppression function for preventing a game ball from unreasonably entering a specific passage TA in a special gaming state of a 16R jackpot (V non-winning) and a 16R jackpot (V). A power failure invalidation avoidance function is provided to avoid the situation where the game ball that should have entered the specific passage TA if a power failure does not occur in the special game state of (winning) is invalidated due to a power failure just before the start of the specific round. ing.

The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is provided with a power failure monitoring process S9202 that continuously executes a part of the process even when a power failure state occurs. The power failure monitoring process S9202 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment has a configuration in which a part of the process is added to the power failure monitoring process S1202 (see FIG. 12) according to the first embodiment. The power failure monitoring process S9202 corresponds to the illegal approach suppression function and the power failure invalidation avoidance function in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the power failure monitoring process S9202 according to the second embodiment. In the power failure monitoring process S9202, first, it is determined whether or not the power failure preparation flag is on (S9001), and if the power failure preparation flag is not on, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal is output (S9002). The power failure preparation flag is a flag that is turned on when it is confirmed that the power failure signal is continuously output from the power supply monitoring unit 911 to the main control board 920 in three confirmations, and is the RAM of the main control board 920. It is composed of a part of. When the power failure preparation flag is turned on, some boards will be in a state of waiting for power off after performing some processing such as completing the payout of the game ball in the middle of payout as a process corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure, and the pachinko machine. Suppress the power consumed in.

In the process of S9002, when it is determined that the power failure signal is being output (S9002: Y), the power failure signal is transmitted to the main control board 920. In this case, the value of the power failure signal counter is updated (for example, "1" addition update) (S9003), and it is determined whether or not the updated value reaches "3" (S9004). The power failure signal counter is a counter for counting the number of times the power failure signal output is confirmed, and is composed of a part of the RAM of the main control board 920.

If it is determined in the process of S9004 that the value of the power failure signal counter is "3" or more (S9004: Y), the process proceeds to the process corresponding to the occurrence of power failure after S9007. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9004 that the value of the power failure signal counter has not reached "3" (S9004: N), the power failure monitoring process S9202 is terminated.

In the processing of S9002, when it is determined that the power failure signal is not being output (S9002: N), the power is normally supplied. In this case, the value of the power failure signal counter is "0". (S9005), if it is not "0" (S9005: N), the power failure signal counter is set to "0" and reset (S9006), and the power failure monitoring process S9202 is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the power failure signal counter is determined to be "0" in the process of S9005 (S9005: Y), the process of S9006 is skipped and the power failure monitoring process S9202 is terminated.

By each process of S9002 to S9006, when the power failure signal is turned on three times in a row, it is determined that a power failure state has occurred and the power failure preparation flag is turned on, and each process corresponding to the power failure state can be executed. ing.

If it is determined in the processing of S9004 that the value of the power failure signal counter is "3" or more (S9004: Y), "0" is set in the power failure signal counter (S9007), and the payout control board 930 and the sub A power cutoff command is transmitted to the control board 940 (S9008). The payout control board 930 and the sub-control board 940 that received the power-off command perform only the minimum necessary processing during execution to promptly prepare for the power-off, and the payout control board 930 and the sub-control board 940 The control stops the control of electric parts and elements that require electric power.

After the processing of S9008, the power failure preparation flag is turned on (S9009), and it is determined whether or not the specific pre-round flag is set (S9010). If the flag before the specific round is set (S9010: Y), the power failure monitoring process S9202 is terminated, and the main control board 920 continues the process before the power failure occurs.

In the processing of S9010, if it is determined that the flag before a specific round is not set (S9010: N), it is determined whether or not it is in the immediately preceding interval (S9011), and if it is in the immediately preceding interval (S9011). : Y), the power failure monitoring process S9202 is terminated. In the process of S9011, if it is determined that the interval is not immediately before (S9011: N), it is determined whether or not the switching solenoid 465 is operating (S9012), and if it is operating the switching solenoid 465 (S9011: N). S9012: Y), the power failure monitoring process S9202 is terminated.

By the processing of S9010 to S9012, from before the end of the round immediately before the specific round until the end of the enterable period in which the specific round is started, the switching solenoid 465 is activated, and the game ball can enter the specific passage TA, the main The control board 920 can continuously execute each process related to the progress of the special gaming state without preparing for a power failure. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs immediately before the specific round, the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA in the special gaming state of 16R jackpot (V non-winning), and the special gaming state of 16R jackpot (V winning). In, the game ball can enter the specific passage TA.

If it is determined in the processing of S9012 that the switching solenoid 465 is not operating (S9012), the power failure preparation flag is turned off (S9013), and a power cutoff command is sent to the power supply / launch control board 900 to power / fire. The control board 900 is prepared for a process corresponding to a power failure (S9014), a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S9015), RAM access is prohibited (S9016), and an infinite loop is entered.

If the power failure preparation flag is determined to be ON in the processing of S9001 (S9001: Y), the process proceeds to the processing of S9010 (S9001: Y). As a result, the main control board 920 does not prepare for a power failure only during the period from before the end of the round immediately before the specific round to the end of the enterable period in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA in the specific round. Then, each process related to the progress of the special gaming state can be continuously executed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, when a predetermined power failure state in which three power failure signals are continuously confirmed is detected by the power failure monitoring process S9202, the game ball to the specific passage TA. The control for advancing the special gaming state is executed during the period including the enterable period in which the switching solenoid 465 is operated so as to be able to enter. Therefore, even in a situation where a power failure occurs, the control for advancing the special gaming state is executed for a certain period including the accessible period. Therefore, the game ball that was supposed to enter the specific passage TA does not enter the specific passage TA due to the occurrence of a power failure, and the player who was playing the game legitimately suffers a disadvantage, or the criminal intentionally causes the power failure state. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a fraudulent act aimed at causing a game ball to unreasonably enter a specific passage TA is performed.

Further, when a predetermined power failure state occurs, a power cutoff command is transmitted to the sub control board 940 before the power failure preparation flag is turned on, and the decorative symbol display device 479 by the sub control board 940. The control is stopped prior to some controls including the operation control of the distribution mechanism 601 and the upper prize winning device 434 by the main control board 920. Therefore, the power consumption due to the display control of the decorative symbol display device 479 can be suppressed, and the amount can be distributed to a part of the control including the control of the distribution mechanism 601 and the upper prize winning device 434. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the progress of the game in the special game state regarding the entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA by using the limited electric power.

Further, when the switching solenoid 465 is turned on in a specific round and the distribution mechanism 601 is controlled to generate an enterable state, even if a predetermined power failure state occurs, even before the enterable state is started. , The power failure preparation flag remains on by each process of S9010 to S9012 until the switching solenoid 465 is turned off and the enterable state ends, and the special symbol-related control timer corresponding to the progress of the special gaming state The value of is continuously updated by the timer update process S1210 (see FIG. 36). Since the special gaming state progresses by updating the special symbol-related control timer, it is possible to suppress the influence of the occurrence of a power failure on the entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA, and the inconvenience caused by the occurrence of the power failure is preferable. It can be easily avoided.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to proceed with each process of the main control board 920 by the power failure monitoring process S9202 in the same manner as before the power failure monitoring, and at least by executing the process related to the update of the special symbol-related control timer, the 16R jackpot (V). In the special gaming state (non-winning), it is preferable because the entry of the gaming ball into the specific passage TA can be suppressed.

Next, the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine according to the third embodiment is provided with a lower prize winning device 2433 having an unjust entry suppressing function of suppressing the entry of a game ball into a specific passage TA in a special gaming state of 16R jackpot (V non-winning). There is. The lower prize winning device 2433 has a mechanism different from that of the lower prize winning devices 433 and 1433 according to the first and second embodiments, and when only one game ball enters the specific passage TA by the distribution mechanism 601. However, when a plurality of game balls enter the specific passage TA, the game balls proceed to the V area side as the specific area and the V prize is generated.

41 (A) to 41 (D) are explanatory views of the lower prize winning device 2433 of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. In FIGS. 41 (B) to 41 (D), for the sake of easy understanding, the direction in which the game ball flows down is illustrated by an arrow, and the game ball is also shown. The mechanism 453, the distribution mechanism 601 in the guided posture, and the closing operation mechanism 2001 exiting from the passage of the game ball are shown by a alternate long and short dash line.

As shown in FIG. 41 (A), the lower prize winning device 2433 is provided with a lower entry control mechanism 453 at the entrance portion of the lower prize opening 433A, and a distribution mechanism 601 provided inside the lower prize opening 433A. Has been done. On the lower side of the distribution mechanism 601 corresponding to the inside of the distribution mechanism 601, the downstream side of the specific passage TA branches in a plurality of directions, and the game ball preferentially does not flow down to one side (right of FIG. 41 (A)). The specific passage TA is configured to be continuous on the lower side). In the region continuous to the lower right side of the specific passage TA, a V region (region with the letter "V" in FIG. 41 (A)) is provided as a specific region, and the region is bent from the left side to the left and is continuous. The passage is continuous with the non-specific passage TA (the region side with the letter "N" in FIG. 41 (A)). A specific passage switch is provided on the downstream side branched to the V region side (not shown), and when the game ball reaches the V region, a V prize is generated.

Inside the distribution mechanism 601 is provided a closing operation mechanism 2001 capable of closing the non-specific passage TA from the specific passage TA. The closing operation mechanism 2001 operates in synchronization with the distribution mechanism 601 under the control of the main control board 920. The closing operation mechanism 2001 opens the passage leading to the non-specific area in the situation where the switching solenoid 465 is turned on and the distribution mechanism 601 is in the guided posture, that is, in the situation where the game ball can enter the specific passage TA. Exit to the rear side. On the other hand, in a situation where the distribution mechanism 601 takes a non-guided posture and the game ball can enter the specific passage TA, the closing operation mechanism 2001 closes the passage leading from the specific passage TA to the non-specific area.

Inside the distribution mechanism 601, only one game ball is closed on the upstream side of the closing operation mechanism 2001 (right side in FIG. 41) in a situation where the closing operation mechanism 2001 closes the passage leading from the specific passage TA to the non-specific area. Is provided with a hold area 2002 that can be held. The holding area 2002 is below the distribution mechanism 601 so that when the distribution mechanism 601 takes a guided posture and the game ball enters the inside of the distribution mechanism 601 the game ball enters with priority over the V region side. It is placed on the side.

On the right side where the V region is located with respect to the holding region 2002, a holding plate portion 2003 is provided so as to project upward and partition the holding region 2002 and the V region corresponding to the downstream side of the specific passage TA. The game ball once entered the hold area 2002 is restricted from moving to the right side by the hold plate portion 2003, and is set to a height that cannot advance to the V area (for example, a height close to the center of the game ball). ing.

As shown in FIG. 41 (B), the game ball that first entered the specific passage TA enters the reserved area 2002 during the enterable period during which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the specific passage TA. .. When a subsequent game ball enters the specific passage TA in a situation where the game ball is held in the hold area 2002, it collides with the game ball (hold ball) held in the hold area 2002 as shown in FIG. 41 (C). Then, the game ball is guided to the V region side by the reserved ball.

When the switching solenoid 465 is turned off after the approachable period has elapsed, the entrance to the specific passage TA is blocked by the distribution mechanism 601 as shown in FIG. 41 (D). As a result, the game ball that subsequently entered the lower prize opening 433A is guided to the non-specific passage TA. Further, when the switching solenoid 465 is turned off, the closing operation mechanism 2001 exits to the rear side, and the holding ball held in the holding area 2002 is guided to the non-specific passage TA.

Here, the number of game balls guided to the specific passage TA side in a specific round by the operation of the distribution mechanism 601 needs to be set to at least two or more because one ball is consumed by the reserved ball. Therefore, it is preferable that a plurality of game balls are guided to the specific passage TA side. The number of game balls guided to the specific passage TA can be adjusted by the length of time that the switching solenoid 465 is on in the specific round. Further, the number of reserved balls for guiding the game ball to the specific passage TA side may be set to another number of two or more, for example, the holding area 2002 may be set to a depth at which the two game balls are held. You may set it.

As described above, in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment, the game is played in the specific passage TA provided with the V region only when a plurality of game balls are guided to the specific passage TA side by the distribution mechanism 601 in the specific round. The ball can be made progressable. Therefore, in the special game state of 16R big hit (V non-winning), in the 5th round, the game ball is caught by the upper entry control mechanism 454 of the upper big prize device 434, and the game ball moves downward before the end of the 5th round. Even if a situation occurs in which the game ball enters the specific passage TA side due to an accidental event such as flowing down, it is possible to prevent the game ball from reaching the V region. Therefore, in the special game state of 16R big hit (V non-winning), the probability that the game ball enters the V area can be brought close to zero, and the profit set so that the player cannot be obtained is unreasonable on the manufacturer side. You can avoid the situation that you get.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to the above embodiment, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to the above embodiment.

(1) In the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the configuration in which the lottery reach generation unit game is assigned to the unit game after the fixed reach generation unit game has been described, but the unit game before the fixed reach generation unit game has been described. A lottery reach generation unit game can be assigned to.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, each transition pattern is assigned a fixed reach generation unit game to one unit game, and a lottery reach generation unit game is assigned to one unit game. As described above, it is possible to allocate a fixed reach generation unit game or a lottery reach generation unit game to a plurality of unit games. In the case of this configuration, if the reach display of the number of times exceeding the total number of the number of unit games assigned to the fixed reach generation unit game and the number of unit games assigned to the lottery reach generation unit game occurs, It is confirmed that it will be a big hit. If a fixed reach generation unit game is assigned to one or more unit games and a lottery reach generation unit game is assigned to one or more unit games, the order of those unit games is appropriately changed. be able to.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the number of unit games to which the fixed reach generation unit game is assigned and the number of unit games to which the lottery reach generation unit game is assigned are the same in each transition pattern. Although the cases have been described, the number of times they are assigned may be different.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, a configuration including both a unit game assigned to a fixed reach generation unit game and a unit game assigned to a lottery reach generation unit game has been described, but only one of them is included. It can also be configured.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the configuration for controlling the generation mode of the reach display of the decorative symbol based on the transition pattern has been described, but another predetermined display related to the variation of the decorative symbol, for example, one of the decorative symbols. It is also possible to control the stopping mode when the unit is stopped, the character appearing due to the change of the decorative symbol, and the generation mode of the effect generated due to the change of the decorative symbol.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the configuration for controlling the generation mode of the reach display of the decorative pattern based on the transition pattern has been described, but the configuration for controlling the generation mode of the fluctuation of the fluctuation time longer than a predetermined time is described. You can also do it.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, a configuration is described in which the generation mode of the reach display in the probabilistic gaming state in which the maximum number of continuous unit games is determined is controlled based on the transition pattern, but the maximum number of continuous unit games is limited. It is also possible to control the occurrence mode of the reach display in the non-probability changing gaming state based on the transition pattern.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, a configuration is described in which the generation mode of the reach display in the probabilistic gaming state, which is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state, is controlled based on the transition pattern. The mode can also be controlled based on the transition pattern.

(2) In the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, in the replacement determination of the conversion value, the number of values included in the range on the maximum value side and the same number of values are added to the conversion value, so that the two separated ranges are combined into one. The case of integrating into a continuous range on the minimum value side and collectively determining whether or not to replace the converted value has been described, but the number of values included in the range on the minimum value side and the same number of values are converted values. By subtracting from, the two separated ranges can be integrated into one continuous maximum value side range, and it can be collectively determined whether or not to replace the converted value.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the case where the set of values not adopted as the stop symbol identification value is a range of continuous values including the minimum value and a range of continuous values including the maximum value has been described. The set of values that are not adopted as the symbol identification value may be a value in a range that does not include the minimum value or the maximum value. Further, the case where the set of values not adopted as the stop symbol identification value is dispersed in two separated ranges has been described, but the case where the set of values not adopted as the stop symbol identification value is one continuous range or three. It can also be configured to be dispersed in the above-mentioned separated range.

Further, in the above pachinko machine 100, the case where the operation used to generate the converted value of the symbol identification value is a combination of the zero-filled left bit shift operation and the exclusive OR operation has been described, but other basic logics have been described. It can be a combination of operations. The basic logical operations include bit inversion operation, 0-filled left bit shift operation, 1-filled left bit shift operation, 0-filled right bit shift operation, 1-filled right bit shift operation, left bit rotation operation, right bit rotation operation, and logical sum. Operations, logical product operations, and exclusive logical sum operations can be mentioned. Further, in the above, the case where the operation used to generate the converted value of the symbol identification value is a combination of only the basic logical operations has been described, but the operation includes an operation different from the basic logical operations such as the four-rule operation. You can also.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, a case where the operation used for generating the converted value of the symbol identification value is performed before the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been described, but the predetermined operation is performed. It can be configured to be performed during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Further, it may be configured to be performed when the variable display period of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends. In addition, when the operation used to generate the converted value of the symbol identification value is significantly more complicated than the operation of this embodiment or includes an operation other than the logical operation, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. If there is a concern about the delay of the start of the symbol or the delay of the transition from the variable display of the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol to the stop symbol display, perform it during the variable display of the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol. Is preferable.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, a configuration has been described in which a value acquired from a jackpot symbol random number counter is converted into a symbol identification value, and then a conversion value is generated by a predetermined operation based on the symbol identification value. For example, the possible value of the jackpot symbol random number counter may be restricted to "250" or less, and the converted value may be generated by a predetermined operation based on the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the case where the range in which the symbol identification value and the stop symbol identification value can be taken is expressed by the same number of bits as the number of basic calculation bits in the main control board 920 has been described, but other bits have been described. It can also be configured as a number.

Further, in the above, a case has been described in which the gameability in the probabilistic gaming state is improved by preventing the player from easily inferring the pattern of the transition in which the loss reach is deterministically or selectively generated in the probabilistic gaming state. However, the number of continuous rounds in the special gaming state is not easily inferred, and the configuration for improving the playability in the special gaming state and the number of continuous unit games in the specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state) are determined. It can be applied to a configuration that improves the playability in a specific gaming state without being easily inferred.

(3) In the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the start condition is satisfied by the start winning to any of the upper middle start winning device 431A, the lower middle starting winning device 431B, or the right starting winning device 432, and the unit game is executed. However, the starting condition for generating the right to the unit game is not limited to the above configuration, and other configurations may be used. For example, the number of devices that satisfy the starting conditions may be different, the establishment of the starting conditions may be conditional on the passage of the ball entry section as the starting device, or the ball entry section provided inside the winning device. The starting condition may be satisfied when the game ball enters.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, as the establishment of the specific game start condition for starting the specific game state corresponding to the probabilistic game state according to each transition pattern, the big hit winning in the unit game based on the start prize and each based on the start prize We have explained the case where the three conditions of determining the stop symbol identification value corresponding to the transition pattern and entering the game ball into the specific passage TA (V prize) in the special game state executed by the big hit winning are satisfied. The establishment of the specific game start condition is not limited to the above conditions, and other conditions may be used, such as omitting the V prize and determining the lottery for shifting to the probabilistic game state when the big hit is won, based on the value of the big hit symbol random number counter. .. In addition, the determination of the stop symbol identification value as the specific game start condition is based on the value of a counter different from the winning random number counter used for the big hit winning, but the value of the winning random number counter corresponds to the type of transition pattern. The winning value may be set and the stop symbol identification value may be determined in correspondence with the value of the winning random number counter.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the stop symbol identification value corresponding to the probabilistic gaming state according to each transition pattern is displayed by the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol. However, instead of or in addition to this, the decorative symbol display device 479 may display information corresponding to the stopped symbol identification value. For example, the decorative symbol display device 479 may be configured to display the number of probable change states B and C by satisfying a predetermined display condition during the special game state, and the number of remaining unit games is 50 or more as the number of probable change states C. When a transition pattern corresponding to a large probability change game state such as is selected, textual information such as "chance has arrived" may be displayed during the special game state, and the number of times the probability change state D is started is set to ". It may be displayed by information including a number suggesting the number of times the privilege is given, such as "50 times or more", or a specific number of remaining unit games in which the probability change state D is started may be displayed as it is.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, only the probabilistic states D and E among the probabilistic states A to E generate a probabilistic gaming state in which the small hit probability is set to a high probability and a privilege is given to the player. The method of differentiating the contents of the benefits given to the player is not limited to the above method, and the gaming state with a high probability of small hits continues for a certain period from the start of the probabilistic gaming state, and the number of continuation ends is determined. The content of the privilege given to the player may be different depending on the stop symbol identification value. In addition, it is not always necessary to make the number of times that the small hit probability as the content of the granted privilege becomes high, and the lengths of the probabilistic states D and E are constant (for example, 10 times), and only the start time is different. You may let me. Even in this case, it is possible to make a difference in the benefits obtained depending on whether or not the game state is changed due to the big hit winning, and the game can be diversified.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the length of the period of the probabilistic gaming state is set to a fixed number of times that the unit game is executed 100 times if the big hit is not won, but the number of times may be varied. In this case, the variable display of the unit game by the first special symbol by the left-handed game method and the variable display of the unit game by the second special symbol by the right-handed game method are executed in parallel at the same time, and one of the variable displays is won. If this is the case, the other variation display is stopped, and an ultra-long variation time (for example, 1 hour) longer than the variation time of the long time 2 is selected as the unit game of the variation time of the long time 1 of the probability variation state C during the probability variation game state. As a setting, a privilege is given from a unit game (for example, a unit game in the probability variation state B) before the ultra-long fluctuation time is selected (for example, the small hit probability is set to a high probability). Is also good. In this case, since the execution time of the probability change state C changes depending on the control of the transition pattern, the size of the privilege given according to the transition pattern can be different, and the transition pattern is a common pattern. However, if the ultra-long fluctuation time is selected in the probability change state C, it will not be possible to continue the game by the right-handed method after that, so it is possible to terminate the game halfway with a preset probability of granting benefits by winning consecutive small hits. can. That is, it is possible to set the end time of the gaming state in which the privilege that the small hit probability becomes high probability is given a predetermined number of times by controlling the fluctuation time according to the transition pattern.

Here, the ultra-long fluctuation time does not necessarily have to be set to a fluctuation time of 1 hour or more, and may be set to a time sufficiently longer than the maximum fluctuation time that can be set in the normal gaming state, and the maximum fluctuation. It is preferable to set the time to be approximately twice or more, and it is preferable to set the time to be approximately three times or more.

Further, as a plurality of transition patterns, another gaming state in which the number of start times of the probability change state D is the same and the super-long fluctuation time is set in the middle of the probability change state D is different from the start of the probability change state D. In this case, even if the number of unit games in which the privilege is given to the player in the probabilistic state D is set to the same number of times, the content of the privilege given to the player can be set. It can be substantially different.

Further, as at least one of the transition patterns, in the unit game of the probability variation state D, the ultra-long fluctuation time may be selected with a lower probability (for example, 1/1000) than the jackpot winning, and in this case, Since the number of consecutive small hits can be made different even in the same transition pattern, it is possible to further increase the mode in which the privilege is given and realize various playability.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, if there is a big hit winning in the middle of the probabilistic gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state in the transition pattern in which the start number of the probabilistic state D is slow is selected, there is no big hit winning. We have explained the configuration in which a gaming state can be selected based on a transition pattern with fewer benefits, but if there is a big hit win during the probabilistic game state, the benefits that are given more reliably than if there was no big hit win. It may be configured to be large. For example, the maximum value of the number of acquired balls in the probability change state D may be set smaller than the minimum value of the number of acquired balls obtained by winning the big hit. The minimum value of the number of acquired balls obtained by winning the jackpot is the number of acquired balls in the special gaming state and the number of acquired balls in the probabilistic gaming state according to the transition pattern in which the number of unit games in the probabilistic state D is set to the minimum number. The total number of acquired balls is illustrated.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, an example of granting a privilege to a player in a probabilistic gaming state after a special gaming state has been described, but the probabilistic gaming is not granted to the player during the special gaming state. It may be configured that the privilege is given only in the state. In addition, it is not always necessary to set the gaming state in which the player is given a privilege by winning the small hit to the probabilistic gaming state, the normal gaming state and the jackpot winning probability are the same, and the small hit winning probability is set to a high period. May be generated corresponding to the stop symbol identification value. Further, regarding the time saving state, it is not always necessary to add the time saving state in the probabilistic gaming state, and a winning device without a mechanism for changing the approach probability may be provided as the right start winning device 432, and the holding function of the unit game may be provided. Is not always necessary. For example, the unit game of the second special symbol cannot be held, and the right of the next unit game is established only when the start prize is generated after the running unit game is completed. good.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, a small hit probability is set to a high probability for a part of the probabilistic gaming states (probability changing states D and E) controlled by the transition pattern, and a privilege is given to the player. Although the privilege-giving game state has been generated, the privilege-giving game state is not limited to the winning probability, and the setting of the fluctuation time by controlling the transition pattern may be realized differently according to the number of executions of the unit game. If a small hit is won, the small hit privilege such as the length of the enterable period during which the game ball can enter the lower large winning device 433 and the number of winnings until the player shifts to the no-entry posture may be changed. Even if it is a unit game that wins a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol is long, the number of game balls that pass near the lower prize winning device 433 during the fluctuation display of the special symbol will increase accordingly, so the fluctuation will occur. The longer the time, the more balls that will not be awarded and the number of balls that can be acquired as a privilege can be reduced. In addition, as for the variable time in the privilege-giving game state, if the game ball is not continuously fired from the start of the variable display, the game ball will not be in time for the transition to the entry allowable posture of the lower prize winning device 433, and the number of acquired balls will decrease. It is preferable that the unit game is set, and it is preferable that the fluctuation time is set shorter than the average time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival of the game ball at the lower prize winning device 433. As a result, in the privilege-giving game state, it is only necessary to set a period in which the unit game in which the lower prize winning device 433 has a long hitting period is continuously generated a plurality of times and the length of the fluctuation time is different due to the small hit winning. It is possible to efficiently give a privilege to the player at a predetermined timing during the probabilistic game state.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the configuration in which the small hit is set as the lottery result of the unit game related to the second special symbol has been described, but the small hit is also set as the lottery result of the unit game related to the first special symbol. May be set, or the small hit winning may be controlled according to the same lottery conditions. However, the right-handed game method clarifies the gameplay in which the privilege is given by the right-handed game method, and the small hit privilege when the small hit is won in the unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the right-handed game method. Is preferably larger than that of the left-handed game method. The permissible time may be different, and the unit game related to the second special symbol may be set to have a longer entry permissible time when winning once, or the unit game related to the second special symbol may be set once. The fluctuation time of the special symbol may be set to be short.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the fluctuation time of the probability change state D is set to the same time as the fluctuation time of a part of the probability change state A and the probability change state C, but the fluctuation time of the probability change state D is set to another state. The fluctuation time may be set to be shorter than the fluctuation time, which makes it easy for the player to understand that the gaming state in which the privilege is given by the continuous winning of small hits in the probabilistic gaming state is different from other gaming states. Can be shown.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, an example in which both the fluctuation time and the small hit condition are changed according to the transition pattern as the gaming state during the probabilistic gaming state after the special gaming state has been described. Only one of the time and the probability of winning a small hit may be changed. For example, even if the selection condition of the fluctuation time in the probabilistic game state is set to be constant, the small hit probability and the small hit privilege of the unit game in the probabilistic game state are changed according to the transition pattern according to the stop symbol identification value. In such a case, it is possible to provide the player with a playability in which the content of the privilege given to the player in the probabilistic game state is different. In addition, even if the small hit condition in the probabilistic gaming state is set to be constant, if the fluctuation time in the probabilistic gaming state is changed according to the transition pattern in accordance with the stop symbol identification value, the probabilistic gaming state is set. By executing the preceding effect, it is possible to provide the player with a playability in which the content of the formal privilege is different.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, a configuration in which a plurality of types of pre-determined preceding effects and post-determined preceding effects are executed as preceding effects has been described, but either one of the pre-determined preceding effects and the post-determined preceding effects has been described. May be implemented, or none of them may be implemented. Further, as the preceding effect, only a part of the above-mentioned plurality of types of preceding effect may be performed.

(4) In the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the upper prize winning device 434, the lower prize winning device 433, and the distribution mechanism 601 allow a certain amount of entry in a round in which the game ball operates to change the traveling direction. After taking a posture or a guided posture, it is assumed that the original posture is restored when the operation end condition is satisfied, but it is not always necessary to operate in a motion pattern that takes a constant posture in each round, and each round does not have to be performed. At least in part, it operates in an operation pattern that takes an approach-allowed posture or a guided posture intermittently or over multiple times, and maintains the original posture before the start of the operation when the operation end condition is satisfied. Cases may be included.

For example, in the round immediately before the specific round (fifth round in the above embodiment), the operation of the upper prize winning device 434, which made it impossible for the game ball to flow down to the specific passage TA side, is intermittently taken into an admissible posture and is constant. The game ball is specified by flowing down in front of the upper prize opening 434A at a fixed rate (for example, 1 in 30 balls). A special gaming state may be generated that progresses to the passage TA side. In this case, in the fifth round, a difficult-to-flow period in which the game ball is difficult to flow down to the specific passage TA side but the game ball flows down with a certain probability can be generated instead of the non-flowable period, and then. Even in a specific round of the special game state of "16R jackpot (V non-winning)" via a short interval, the game ball enters the specific passage TA with a small probability (for example, about 15%), and V winning can occur. Playability can be added.

In addition, the operation of the distribution mechanism 601 that made it possible for the game ball to flow down to the specific passage TA in the specific round (sixth round in the above embodiment) is intermittently guided and taken at a fixed cycle or irregularly. It is configured to temporarily take a non-guided posture, and a special gaming state is generated in which the game ball advances to the non-specific passage TB side instead of the specific passage TA at a fixed ratio (for example, the ratio of 1 ball in 10 balls). You may let it. In this case, it is possible to add a game property that the game ball does not accidentally enter the specific passage TA during the approachable period in the sixth round of the special gaming state of "16R jackpot (V prize)", and the enterable period. At 100%, the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA, and the game ball enters the specific passage TA with a high probability (for example, about 95%), and it is possible to add a game property in which a V prize can be generated.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, 100% or 0% depends on the type of special gaming state (specifically, "16R jackpot (V winning)" and "16R jackpot (V non-winning)". The case where the game ball enters the specific passage TA with a probability has been described, but a special game in which the game ball enters the specific passage TA with at least one of the probabilities, or in addition to those probabilities. A state may be generated. For example, a special game state in which the enterable period during which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA is set to be substantially the same as the launch time interval of the game ball is generated, and the probability is approximately 70%. It may be configured to include a special gaming state in which the game ball enters the specific passage TA. The length of the interval time immediately before the specific round and the game ball can enter the specific passage TA from the lower prize winning device 433 in the specific round. By making the ratio to the length of the enterable formation period forming the state different, it is possible to set a special gaming state in which the game ball enters the specific passage TA with various probabilities.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the configuration in which a V prize is always won with a 100% probability when entering the specific passage TA by the distribution mechanism 601 has been described, but the game ball that has entered the specific passage TA is a game ball. By the distribution of, the player enters a specific area in the specific passage TA with a certain probability (for example, one-third) and a V prize is generated, and only when the V prize is generated, the gaming state advantageous to the player (for example). , Probability change game state) may occur.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the game ball enters the specific passage TA in the special gaming state having a long interval time as the waiting time immediately before the specific round among the plurality of types of special gaming states in which only the waiting time is different. Although the configuration has been described, the probability that the game ball will enter the specific passage TA may be higher in the special gaming state in which the waiting time is short immediately before the specific round. For example, as the interval time, the opening time elapses after the operation of the combined operation device 435, and then the second round starts via the first round for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). It may be configured to generate a plurality of special gaming states in which the interval times of the first round and the second round are different, and the game ball passing through the combination operating device 435 enters the specific passage TA on the downstream side of the combination operating device 435. The second round is started so as to include the timing of entry to generate an enterable formation period, so that the game ball can enter the specific passage TA, or the game ball can enter slightly after the timing of entry. It is also possible to generate a special gaming state in which a formation period is generated to make the game ball inaccessible to the specific passage TA, and the probability of the game ball entering the specific passage TA is different. Further, when the game ball that has passed through the combination operating device 435 is configured to enter the specific passage TA, the probability that the game ball enters the specific passage TA differs depending on a plurality of special gaming states having different interval times. It is not necessary, for example, a plurality of special gaming states having different opening times may be generated, and the probability that the gaming ball may enter the specific passage TA may be different with the subsequent first round as a specific round.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the case where all the game balls passing through the right flow path KR may proceed to the inlet side of the specific passage TA has been described, but the distribution mechanism 601 in the right flow path KR has been described. A control mechanism for controlling the flow of the game ball may be provided on the upstream side so that the game ball flows only at a constant rate on the distribution mechanism 601 side. For example, a seesaw-type structure in which the flow direction is switched for each ball between a flow path in which the specific passage TA is located on the downstream side and a flow path in which the specific passage TA is not located on the downstream side is upstream from the distribution mechanism 601. One or more may be provided on the side so that the game ball advances to the specific passage TA side only at a time interval that is a plurality of times the firing time interval. As a result, the number of game balls heading for the specific passage TA can be reduced in a situation where the game ball can enter the specific passage TA during the inaccessible formation period. Settings and the like can be easily performed.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, as a plurality of types of special gaming states in which only the standby time is different, a special gaming state of "16R jackpot (V winning)" and "16R jackpot (V non-winning)" occurs. However, it is not always necessary to change the probability that the game ball will enter the specific passage TA depending on the special gaming state in which only the waiting time is different. The probability that the game ball enters the specific passage TA may be changed depending on the special game state in which other conditions are different. Even in this case, in a plurality of special game states in which the probability that the game ball enters the specific passage TA is different, setting the same control in some rounds can simplify the control of the special game state. Is preferable.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, a function of differentiating the probability that a game ball enters a specific passage TA depending on a plurality of types of special gaming states having different standby times and a flow path leading to the specific passage TA in the event of a power failure are performed. A power failure ball holding function that keeps the game ball within a predetermined range, and a swing that straddles the game ball from before the timing when the game ball arrives at the distribution mechanism 601 that is in an approachable state in a specific round. Although the case where the machine has a function of controlling the firing of the game ball so as to be reachable to the minute mechanism 601 has been described, the game machine may not have at least one of these functions. For example, a plurality of types of special gaming states having different interval times do not occur so that the probability that the game ball enters the specific passage TA is different, and the game ball is moved to the specific passage TA by the operation control of the distribution mechanism 601 other than the interval time. The configuration may have different probabilities of entering. Even in such a case, the transition control of the gaming state determined before the power failure can be restored by the ball holding function at the time of power failure, and the specific passage TA can be restored by setting the round end condition before the specific round. It is preferable that the launch operation can be promoted so that the game ball can easily enter the specific passage TA in a situation where the game ball can enter.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, when the lottery related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is won, the type of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result (for example, the symbol identification value or the stop symbol identification value). The type of special game state is fixed according to the type of special game, and with the probability set for each type of special symbol, the special game state in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA and the special game state in which it cannot enter. Has been described, but not limited to this, which of the special gaming states in which the admission of the gaming ball to the specific passage TA differs depending on whether or not the gaming ball can enter the specific passage TA is generated instead of or in addition to the condition. It may be decided. For example, even if the symbol identification value as the type of the special symbol is the same, the probability of occurrence of the special gaming state in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA may be different according to the gaming state in which the winning occurs. For example, when a lottery related to the second special symbol is won and the symbol identification value is "0", the probability changes at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the variation display is started) in the game won by the lottery. In the game state, there is a 100% probability that the game ball can enter the specific passage TA, and in the short-time game state, there is a 0% probability that the game ball can enter the specific passage TA. The main control board 920 may control the state (that is, a special game state in which the game ball cannot enter the specific passage TA). In this case, the possibility of entering the game ball into the specific passage TA for the game state at a predetermined timing may be set differently for a plurality of symbol identification values, whereby the probability according to the game state may be set. It can be a gaming machine that generates a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. For example, in the winning of the second special symbol in the probabilistic gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state is generated with a 100% probability, and in the winning of the second special symbol in the time-saving gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state is generated with an 80% probability. However, the generation control of these gaming states can be easily generated by the special gaming states having different interval times.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the configuration in which the distribution mechanism 601 is provided on the downstream side inside the lower prize winning device 433 has been described, but both the lower prize winning device 433 and the distribution mechanism 601 are not necessarily provided. It is not necessary to configure the system so that the lower prize winning device 433 is omitted, and only the distribution mechanism 601 operates in a specific round. The game ball may be distributed to the exit).

(5) In the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the configuration in which the movable projecting pieces S1 to S5 exit from the flow path of the game ball in a situation where a power failure occurs has been described. The movable projecting pieces S1 to S5 maintain the state of projecting into the flow path of the game ball to exert the ball holding function and the function of suppressing illegal entry during a power failure, and the game ball flowing down the flow path leading to the specific passage TA is constant. It may be configured to keep within the range of. In this case, the movable projecting piece S5 located at the most downstream is provided inside the lower prize winning device 1433, and the game ball that was supposed to surely enter the specific passage TA is more reliably moved into the specific passage TA. It is preferable because it can be held on the flow path leading to it.

Further, the processing of S2111 of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment may be omitted, and the upper entry restricting solenoid 464 may not be turned off. During the period when the pause flag is set, the game ball does not flow down the right flow path KR, so there is no game ball that enters the upper prize opening 434A, and the player can set the pause flag. This is because the number of game balls that can be acquired in the special game state does not increase.

Further, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, in a part of the special gaming state, when the right-handed flow path KR by the right-handed detection switch 603 does not flow the game ball for a certain period of time, the abnormal firing state is detected. The configuration for suspending the special gaming state by setting the pause flag has been described, but instead of this, or in addition to that, the pause flag may be set according to other conditions. For example, whether or not the player is executing the firing operation is detected by the state of the contact sensor 254 of the firing operation device 250, and the pause flag is set with at least one of the conditions that the firing operation is being executed. In this case, it is the responsibility of the player to detect the abnormal firing state on the condition that the player intentionally executes the firing operation, and in the situation where the player does not intentionally perform the firing operation. It is possible to add a game property in which a special game state progresses.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first and third embodiments, at least one of the movable projecting pieces S1 to S5 according to the second embodiment is placed on the right side flow path KR or the lower prize winning device 433, 2433. It may be provided inside the.

(6) The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit is made, the pachinko machine may be implemented so that the expected big hit value can be increased until the big hit state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times or three times) including the big hit. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be in a special gaming state on condition that the ball wins a prize in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as an arrange ball type pachinko machine and a sparrow ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines, and may be applied to slot machines, or may be applied to gaming machines such as parrots in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

<Invention extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing problems and effects as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like. Further, the meanings and examples of terms described in each feature may be applied as meanings and examples of terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Feature 10>
A lottery means (for example, a winning random number counter and a jackpot initial value random number counter) for performing a predetermined lottery (for example, a first special symbol lottery or a second special symbol lottery), and
A display means for displaying a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying them in a combination according to the result of the predetermined lottery.
A game state control means that changes the game state to a specific game state (for example, a probabilistic game state) based on the winning in the predetermined lottery.
It is a gaming machine that includes
As a mode of variable display of the plurality of symbols executed by the display means and not winning the predetermined lottery, a specific display in which a part of the plurality of symbols is stopped in a predetermined combination. Includes a variable display of a specific loss mode in which the plurality of symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination according to the loss via (for example, reach display).
A selection means for selecting a control pattern (for example, a transition pattern) for controlling the execution of the variation display according to the specific loss mode from a plurality of control patterns before the specific game state is reached for each unit game in the specific game state. (For example, a jackpot symbol random number counter and a jackpot symbol initial value random number counter) are included.
Two or more control patterns (for example, transition patterns) having different permissible times of permissible unit games (for example, fixed reach generation unit games and lottery reach generation unit games) corresponding to the unit games that allow the variable display in the specific loss mode. The plurality of control patterns (for example, 120 types of transition patterns) are defined so that the permissible number of times of the permissible unit game is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 2 times), and the permissible number of times of the permissible unit game is defined. A gaming machine characterized in that control is performed so as to prohibit variable display in the specific loss mode in different unit games.

In a conventional gaming machine, when a jackpot is won in a jackpot lottery, it is known that after a special gaming state, a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state over a predetermined number of unit games is known. ing. In such a gaming machine, in a unit game in which a big hit is not won in a specific gaming state, the variation mode of the symbol is determined by a lottery of the variation mode performed for each unit game, and the lost symbol is displayed through the reach display. The result of the big hit lottery is notified in the mode in which the lost symbol is displayed without going through the reach display or the reach display. In the unit game in which the jackpot is won, the lottery result is notified in such a manner that the jackpot symbol is displayed via the reach display.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in each unit game in a specific gaming state, a mode accompanied by a reach display is selected by lottery with a certain probability when a big hit is not won. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may feel dissatisfied in a situation where the reach display is repeatedly generated during the specific gaming state but the player is not elected, and there is room for improvement in the playability of the specific gaming state.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the feature 10 can improve the playability in the specific gaming state.

That is, in each control pattern, the permissible number of times that the variation display in the specific loss mode is allowed is limited to a predetermined number or less. Winning in the lottery is confirmed. Therefore, even if the game progresses without winning the predetermined lottery in the specific game state, the number of times the specific display is executed increases toward the allowable number of times, and therefore, as the game progresses, the winning in the predetermined lottery is performed. Expectations can be amplified. Thereby, the playability in the specific gaming state can be further improved.

Further, since the specific display does not occur repeatedly when the predetermined lottery is not won, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied because the specific display does not occur repeatedly but is not won. In addition, it is possible to disperse the unit games in which the specific display is generated in the specific game state, as in the case where the lottery for generating the specific display is performed for each unit game.

<Feature 11>
In the gaming machine according to feature 10,
The permissible unit game includes a definite unit game (for example, a definite reach generation unit game) that displays variations in the specific loss mode.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in each of the plurality of control patterns, at least one unit game in the specific gaming state is assigned to the definite unit game.

In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 11, in the specific gaming state, the specific display that can be expected to win in a predetermined lottery is executed at least once, and whether or not the variable display in the specific loss mode is performed is an allowable unit. Winning in a predetermined lottery can be expected, as in the case of determining by lottery in a game or in the case of determining whether or not to perform variable display in a specific loss mode as in a conventional gaming machine by lottery in each unit game. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific display is not executed at all even if it shifts to the specific gaming state.

<Feature 12>
In the gaming machine according to feature 10 or 11,
A gaming machine characterized in that the permissible unit game is not assigned to a predetermined unit game in all of the plurality of control patterns.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 12, if the predetermined lottery is not won, the specific display will not be executed in the predetermined unit game. Therefore, if the specific display is executed, the predetermined lottery will be executed. It is possible to easily set a unit game in which it is confirmed that the player has won. In addition, it is possible to set a unit game in which an allowable unit game is not assigned according to a rule that is easy for the player to understand (for example, doublet), and whether or not the unit game is a winning decision when a specific display occurs. It is possible to realize playability that is easy to understand.

<Feature 20>
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery (for example, a big hit symbol random number counter and a big hit symbol initial value random number counter) and a display information generating means for generating display information (for example, a stop symbol identification value) based on the lottery result by the lottery means. (Stop symbol generation process S1404), display means for displaying the display information (for example, special symbol display devices 471 and 472 related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol), and a game mode (for example, based on the lottery result). For example, a gaming machine including a game mode determining means for determining a transition pattern in a probabilistic gaming state).
The display information generation means generates a conversion value by a predetermined operation (for example, a combination of a 0-filled left bit shift operation and an exclusive-OR operation) based on a value corresponding to the lottery result (for example, a symbol identification value). The conversion means is provided, and when the conversion value generated by the conversion means is a predetermined value, the conversion means for replacing the conversion value with a predetermined replacement value is provided.
The display information is generated without being replaced by the replacement means when the conversion value generated by the conversion means is different from the predetermined value, and the conversion value generated by the conversion means is the predetermined value. When the above is the case, the gaming machine is characterized in that it is generated through replacement by the replacement means.

In a conventional gaming machine, the display of the result of a predetermined lottery is diversified, and based on the result display, the mode of the game progress depending on the result of the predetermined lottery cannot be easily determined, and the predetermined lottery is performed. A configuration that improves playability in a gaming state after winning is known. For example, in the lottery for transition to the special gaming state, it is not possible to easily determine which of the multiple types of jackpots with different profits is won, and the profit is obtained from the jackpot with low profit during the special gaming state accompanying the jackpot. There is a configuration that improves the playability by performing promotion production to a high jackpot.

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the mode of displaying the result is determined according to the random number by referring to the table showing the correspondence between the random number used in the predetermined lottery and the mode of displaying the result. However, when the mode of displaying the result is determined based on the table, the data capacity for forming the table also increases as the mode of displaying the result is increased, and the display mode of the predetermined lottery result is diversified. There was room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 20, the display mode of the predetermined lottery result can be suitably diversified, and the game playability in the game after winning the predetermined lottery can be improved.

That is, in the display means, it is not based on the lottery result itself which is highly related to the game mode, but based on the display information (conversion value or replacement value) which is generated by a predetermined operation based on the lottery result and whose relevance is diluted. The lottery result is displayed. Therefore, depending on the player, it is difficult to infer the game mode based on the lottery result from the display on the display means. As a result, the playability in the gaming state set based on the lottery result is improved. Further, in the generation of display information, except for a part, since the display information is generated by a predetermined operation based on the lottery result, the display information is determined based on the table showing the correspondence between the lottery result and the display information. Compared with the above, various display information can be easily generated without significantly increasing the program capacity and the data capacity. Further, when the converted value is a value that is not desired to be adopted as display information or a value that is desired to be used for other purposes, those values can be suitably excluded.

<Feature 21>
In the gaming machine described in feature 20,
The predetermined operation in the conversion means includes a basic logical operation for generating a value in a specific bit range from a value corresponding to the lottery result, which is the same as the array of the predetermined bit range in the value. A gaming machine characterized in that it is an operation that combines a basic logical operation of a value generated by the operation and a value corresponding to the lottery result.

In the configuration described in the feature 21, since the operation in the conversion means is composed only of the basic logical operation, the conversion means is compared with the case where the operation different from the basic logical operation such as the general four-rule operation is included. The operation in can be performed at high speed. Further, since the operation in the conversion means does not include the operation of exchanging the bit array in the predetermined bit range, the operation can be performed at a higher speed than the operation of exchanging the bit array in the predetermined bit range. As a result, the operation in the conversion means can be completed in one interrupt of the timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined interval, so that the delay of the next interrupt can be suppressed and the execution is distributed in a plurality of interrupts. The program can be simplified as compared with the case where the game progresses, and the progress of the game can be controlled smoothly.

<Feature 22>
In the gaming machine according to feature 20 or 21,
The predetermined value includes a minimum value represented by a plurality of bits constituting the display information, and includes a value in a range on the predetermined minimum value side continuous from the minimum value and a maximum value represented by the plurality of bits. Including, including the value in the range on the predetermined maximum value side continuous up to the maximum value,
The display means includes a display body corresponding to each bit of the plurality of bits and whose display mode is determined according to the value of each bit, and all of the display bodies have the same display mode. The lottery result is displayed in a display form different from the predetermined display form including.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 22, when the converted value is a value that is not desired to be adopted as display information or a value that is desired to be used for other purposes, those values can be easily excluded.

<Feature 23>
In the gaming machine described in feature 22,
The display information is composed of bits having the same number or multiples as the number of basic operation bits.
The replacement means adds or subtracts a predetermined correction value to the conversion value generated by the conversion means, and continuously sets a value in a range on the predetermined minimum value side and a value in a range on the predetermined maximum value side. A gaming machine, characterized in that it is converted to, and based on the continuous value, it is determined whether or not to replace the converted value generated by the conversion means with the predetermined replacement value.

In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 23, the values that are not to be adopted as display information or the values that are desired to be used for other purposes are dispersed in the minimum value side range including the minimum value and the maximum value side range including the maximum value. However, by adding or subtracting predetermined values, those ranges can be integrated into one continuous range. Therefore, it is possible to collectively determine whether or not to replace the converted value with a predetermined replacement value, and the control process is simplified.

<Feature 24>
In the gaming machine according to feature 22 or 23,
The replacement means adds a conversion value generated by the conversion means and a value corresponding to the number of values included in the predetermined maximum value side range based on the addition operation of the plurality of bits to obtain a determination value. When the determination value is less than the sum of the number of values included in the predetermined minimum value side range and the number of values included in the predetermined maximum value side range, the determination value is determined. A gaming machine characterized in that it is replaced with a replacement value corresponding to the determination value and the replacement value is set as the display information.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 24, the minimum value side range including the minimum value and the maximum value side range including the maximum value can be integrated into a continuous range including the minimum value.

<Feature 25>
In the gaming machine according to feature 22 or 23,
The replacement means generates a determination value by subtracting a value corresponding to the number of values included in the predetermined minimum value side range from the conversion value generated by the conversion means, and the determination value is the maximum value. If the value exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the sum of the number of values included in the predetermined minimum value side range and the number of values included in the predetermined maximum value side range, the determination value is determined. A gaming machine characterized in that it is replaced with a replacement value corresponding to the determination value and the replacement value is set as the display information.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 25, the minimum value side range including the minimum value and the maximum value side range including the maximum value can be integrated into a continuous range including the maximum value.

<Feature 30>
A determination means (winning determination process S1403 of the main control board 920) for determining whether or not a predetermined specific game start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition is satisfied,
Judgment information display means (special symbol display device 471, 472) that displays information corresponding to the determination result of the determination means, and
When it is determined by the determination means that the specific game start condition is satisfied, the combination of a plurality of unit games executed based on the satisfaction of the plurality of start conditions makes the player more comfortable with the normal gaming state. It is a gaming machine provided with a specific gaming state control means (each process for controlling the probabilistic gaming state of the main control board 920) that generates an advantageous specific gaming state (probability changing gaming state).
The specific game state control means generates a plurality of types of specific game states in which at least one of the content and the grant time of the privilege given to the player is different.
The determination means determines whether or not the specific game start condition set corresponding to the plurality of types of specific game states is satisfied, and determines whether or not the specific game start condition is satisfied.
The determination information display means displays information corresponding to a specific game state in which control is started by the specific game state control means in a unit game based on a start condition in which the specific game start condition is satisfied.
Before the specific gaming state is started, which of the plurality of types of specific gaming states is to be started is selected, and the information corresponding to the specific gaming state to be executed is displayed by the determination information display means. A gaming machine.

In a conventional gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters the starting opening as a normal game and a big hit is won by a lottery based on the entry, a special gaming state is set, and a large number of gaming balls can win a prize in the winning opening in the special gaming state. The configuration is known. Further, in this type of gaming machine, a probabilistic gaming state in which the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the normal gaming state after the special gaming state is reached, or a gaming state in which the gaming ball is easier to enter into the starting port than in the normal gaming state, etc. Is also known to diversify the game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, whether or not to transition to an advantageous gaming state is determined by the lottery result performed by the entry of the gaming ball into the starting port, so that the transition to the advantageous gaming state is achieved. There is a problem that it tends to be a uniform game such as emphasizing the result of each lottery. Further, when a favorable gaming state is newly provided, there is a problem that fraud aimed at the advantageous gaming state may be performed.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 30, a continuous game configured by satisfying a plurality of starting conditions as a specific gaming state can be executed by a plurality of types of patterns having at least different privilege contents or grant times. Information corresponding to the content of the continuous game can be transmitted to the player and the manager of the game hall as needed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of diversifying the playability and suppressing fraudulent acts by continuous gaming configured by satisfying a plurality of starting conditions.

<Feature 31>
In the gaming machine according to feature 30,
The specific game state control means determines, as the content of the unit game to be executed when the start condition is satisfied, a variable time setting condition (variable time) and whether or not to give the player a privilege. Memorize a plurality of control patterns in which at least some of the conditions for granting (small hit probability) and the content of the privilege when the privilege granting condition is satisfied (time allowed to enter the winning opening) are different. The pattern storage means (ROM of the main control board 920) is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the unit game is controlled by a control pattern corresponding to the number of executions of the unit game from the start to the end of the specific game state to generate the specific game state.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 31, the content and time when the privilege is given can be set in advance before the specific gaming state is started, and the information corresponding to the content can be shown to the player in advance. Compared to the gameplay in which benefits are given simply by winning one unit game, new gameplay in which benefits are given across multiple unit games and the granting of those benefits are expected at an early stage. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be combined with a directing effect. Further, by applying a plurality of control patterns to each unit game, it is possible to control a specific game state composed of a plurality of unit games, so that it is easy to control the privilege given by executing the specific game state. be able to.

<Feature 32>
In the gaming machine according to feature 30 or 31,
A privilege grant information display means (hold information output setting process S1707) for displaying privilege grant timing information corresponding to the privilege grant timing to be granted to the player during the specific game state is provided.
The specific game state control means provides a privilege-giving game state (probability-changing state D) in which a unit game in which a privilege is easily given to a player is more likely to be given to the player than in a normal game state, and a privilege-giving game state is compared with the privilege-giving game state. The unit game that is difficult to be given is executed after the execution of the game states (probability change states A to C) in which the unit games are continuously executed, to generate the specific game state, and the privilege after the specific game state is started. It generates a plurality of types of specific game states in which the number of times a unit game is executed until the granted game state is started is different.
The privilege granting information display means is at least a part (determined) of the privilege grant timing information before the privilege granting game state is started and after the start condition of the unit game in which the privilege granting game state is started is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by displaying (post-preceding effect display).

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 32, in the specific gaming state, a plurality of unit games before the start of the privilege-giving game state are executed. It can be a period during which the game is executed in anticipation of the game state. Then, after the start condition of the unit game in which the privilege granting game state is started is satisfied during that period, the privilege granting information display means displays the privilege granting time information. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation where the grant of the privilege is invalidated depending on the progress of the game after the privilege grant timing information is displayed, or the setting is such that it is difficult to establish the starting condition, so that the privilege is granted by the time the privilege is granted. It is possible to display the privilege grant timing information at a suitable timing that does not cause inconvenience such as forcing the player to consume a considerable amount of time and the game ball.

<Feature 33>
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features 30 to 32,
When the predetermined privilege granting condition is satisfied during the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state control means may perform another game from the executing specific gaming state before the predetermined number of unit games are executed. A gaming machine characterized by shifting to a state.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 33, a situation may occur in which the specific gaming state ends without necessarily waiting for a predetermined number of unit games. Therefore, even if the information corresponding to the specific game state is displayed by the information display means, the progress of the subsequent game can be diversified, and the content of the specific game state is uniquely selected before the start. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the subsequent game feels monotonous. In addition, since the system shifts to another gaming state when the privilege granting condition is satisfied, another privilege is granted to the player even if at least a part of the privilege expected during the specific gaming state is not granted to the player. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player as compared with the case where a part of the specific gaming state is simply lost.

<Feature 34>
In the gaming machines according to the features 30 to 33,
A ball entry section (lower large prize device 433) that gives the player a predetermined privilege when the game ball enters, and
An easy-to-enter state in which a game ball can enter the entry portion, a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the entry portion from the entry-capable state, or a game ball cannot enter the entry portion. It is equipped with a ball entry state switching means (lower entry restriction solenoid 463) that generates a ball entry difficult state corresponding to a different state.
The specific game control means controls the ball entry state switching means in advance when the predetermined state continuation winning condition is satisfied during the specific game state based on the establishment of the start condition. A means for generating a ball-fillable state (special symbol-related process S1217) that is generated over a specified ball-playable period, and
It is equipped with a fluctuation time selection means (special symbol change start setting process S1405) that selects the fluctuation display time to be executed before displaying the information corresponding to the establishment of the state continuation winning condition.
The variable time selection means determines the variable time of the unit game based on the selection conditions of a plurality of types of variable times having different lengths of the variable time selected according to the number of unit games executed in the specific game state. A gaming machine characterized by selection.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 34, by controlling the fluctuation time, it is possible to control the ratio of the time during which the ball can be entered during the specific gaming state, and the game can be easily controlled in the specific gaming state. Can be diversified. In addition, in the specific game state, only by setting a period in which the length of the fluctuation time is different, such as by continuously generating a unit game having a short fluctuation time and a long ball entry period a plurality of times, in the specific game state, Benefits can be efficiently given to the player at a predetermined timing.

<Feature 40>
A determination means (winning determination process S1403 of the main control board 920) for determining whether or not a predetermined specific game start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition is satisfied,
An identification information display means (decorative symbol display device 479) that displays fluctuations when the start condition is satisfied and displays information corresponding to the determination result of the determination means after the fluctuation display.
Information display control means (main control board 920 and sub control board 940) that control the display contents of the identification information display means, and
When it is determined by the determination means that the specific game start condition is satisfied, the combination of a plurality of unit games executed based on the satisfaction of the plurality of start conditions makes the player more comfortable with the normal gaming state. It is a gaming machine provided with a specific gaming state control means (each process for controlling the probabilistic gaming state of the main control board 920) that generates an advantageous specific gaming state (probability changing gaming state).
It is equipped with a holding means (a function of holding the unit game of the main control board 920) that can hold the execution of the unit game based on the establishment of other starting conditions established during the execution of the unit game based on the establishment of the starting condition of 1.
The specific game state control means generates a plurality of types of specific game states in which the privilege granted to the player is given at different times.
The information display control means is provided with information corresponding to the timing of granting the privilege in the specific gaming state in which control is started by the specific gaming state control means before the start condition of the unit game in which the privilege is granted is satisfied. The first grant timing display means (process of S1908 and S1912 of hold information output setting process S1707) to be displayed on the
During the period when the start condition of the unit game in which the privilege is granted is satisfied and the execution of the unit game is suspended by the holding means, the display is different from the display by the first grant timing display means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second grant timing display means (process of S1910 of hold information output setting process S1707) for displaying information corresponding to the grant timing of the privilege.

In a conventional gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters the starting opening as a normal game and a big hit is won by a lottery based on the entry, a special gaming state is set, and a large number of gaming balls can win a prize in the winning opening in the special gaming state. The configuration is known. Further, in this type of gaming machine, a probabilistic gaming state in which the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the normal gaming state after the special gaming state is reached, or a gaming state in which the gaming ball is easier to enter into the starting port than in the normal gaming state, etc. Is also known to diversify the game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175).

However, since the result of the lottery performed by the entry of the game ball into the starting port determines whether or not the game transitions to the advantageous game state, the game start condition of whether or not the game transitions to the advantageous game state is determined. Only after it is established, it is not possible to execute the effect corresponding to the lottery result, and even if it has a hold function, there is a problem that it can only be an effect for the game whose execution is suspended. ..

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 40, a continuous game composed of the establishment of a plurality of start conditions as a specific gaming state can be executed by a plurality of types of patterns in which the privilege granting time is different, and further, the privilege can be executed. The grant time is displayed by the first grant timing display means after the start condition of the unit game in which the privilege is granted is satisfied, and is displayed by the second grant timing display means even before the start condition is satisfied. To. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation for the grant of the privilege from an early stage before the establishment of the starting condition corresponding to the unit game at the time when the privilege is granted, or to gradually increase the expectation for the grant of the privilege. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing an effect associated with a continuous game configured by satisfying a plurality of start conditions, such as executing an effect.

<Feature 41>
In the gaming machine according to feature 40,
The specific game state control means is a pattern storage means (main control board 920) that stores a plurality of control patterns having different setting conditions of at least a variable time as the content of a unit game executed when the start condition is satisfied. ROM)
A gaming machine characterized in that the unit game is controlled by a control pattern corresponding to the number of executions of the unit game from the start to the end of the specific game state to generate the specific game state.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 41, by applying a plurality of control patterns to each unit game, it is possible to control at least the variation time of the variation display in the specific gaming state composed of a plurality of unit games. , Combining the production corresponding to the grant time of the privilege and the variable time, the variable display with a long fluctuation time corresponds to the grant time of the privilege, making it easier for the player to pay attention to the unit game that expects the grant time of the privilege. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform an effect that suggests when the privilege is granted.

<Feature 42>
In the gaming machine according to feature 40 or 41,
A unit game number storage unit that stores information corresponding to the number of times a unit game is executed in the specific game state, and a unit game number storage unit.
When the start condition is satisfied during the period in which the execution of the unit game is suspended by the holding means, the execution time of the unit game for which the start condition is satisfied is determined based on the information stored in the unit game number storage unit. The execution time to be derived is provided with the derivation means (processes of S1805 to S1807 of the hold information output setting process S1707).
The second grant timing display means displays information corresponding to the grant timing of the privilege depending on whether or not the execution timing of the unit game derived by the execution timing derivation means corresponds to the grant timing of the privilege. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 42, the execution time of the unit game for which the starting condition is satisfied is derived based on the information corresponding to the number of times the unit game is executed in the specific gaming state. Therefore, compared to the case where the number of times the unit game is scheduled to be executed corresponding to the execution time of the unit game for which the start condition is satisfied and the number of times the unit game being executed in the specific game state are managed separately are managed. The storage area of the RAM used as the unit game number storage unit can be reduced, and the possibility that the synchronization of updates of both times is broken can be reduced.

<Feature 43>
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features 40 to 42,
The second grant time display means is a specific game pre-time display means (processes S1908 and S1912 of the hold information output setting process S1707) that displays information corresponding to the privilege grant time before the start of execution of the specific game state. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 43, information corresponding to the content of continuous gaming in a specific gaming state can be transmitted to a player or a game field manager as needed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of diversifying the playability of continuous gaming and suppressing fraudulent activities.

<Feature 50>
A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state in which a winning condition that gives a gaming value more easily than a normal gaming state is satisfied when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, and the special gaming state is a combination of multiple rounds. In a gaming machine configured with
An approachable state (guided posture) in which a game ball can be distributed to a plurality of areas including a specific area (specific passage TA) and the game ball can enter the specific area in at least a part of the plurality of rounds. Distribution mechanism that can be generated (distribution mechanism 601, 1601) and
A switching mechanism (upper grand prize device 434, 1434) provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and capable of switching whether or not to advance the game ball to the distribution mechanism side.
The control unit of the operation control means (distribution mechanism 601, 1601 in the main control board 920 and the upper prize winning device 434, 1434) that controls the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism to generate the special gaming state. )When,
When a game ball enters the specific area, a game state control means (a game state control unit on the main control board 920) that generates a specific game state that is more advantageous than when the game ball does not enter the specific area is provided. Prepare,
In the motion control means, the game ball whose traveling direction is controlled by the switching mechanism passes through the predetermined area or the predetermined time is set before the start of the predetermined round (specific round) in which the approachable state occurs. A predetermined round start preparation condition including at least one of elapses is satisfied, and after the round start preparation condition is satisfied, a waiting time (“0.5 seconds” and “3” set to at least two different times is satisfied. After any one of ".
As the special gaming states having different waiting times, a first special gaming state (16R jackpot (V non-winning) special gaming state) and a second special gaming state (16R jackpot) having a longer waiting time than the first special gaming state. (V prize) special game state) is provided,
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that a gaming ball enters the specific area varies depending on the length of the waiting time.

A conventional gaming machine is equipped with a variable winning device that allows an entry of a gaming ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a player when the gaming ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area. There are known gaming machines that are in an advantageous gaming state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-028117).

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, whether or not the gaming ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area is defined by a substantially constant probability according to the allowed entry operation of the gaming ball into the variable winning device. There is room for improvement in the form in which the game ball enters a specific area.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 50, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably advancing a gaming ball into a specific region that generates a gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, since the length of the waiting time before the start of the specific round can be changed to make the probability that the game ball enters the specific area different, at least one of the control patterns by the motion control means for a plurality of types of special gaming states. The parts can be easily shared and the control can be simplified, while the probability of entering a specific area can be easily different. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the probability of the gaming ball entering a specific area that affects the transition of the gaming state while suppressing the cost increase of the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 50, the term "passing through the switching mechanism" may mean passing through a position where the traveling direction of the gaming ball is switched by the switching mechanism, and the front side of the opening / closing member standing up as the switching mechanism is played. This includes the case where the gaming ball does not come into contact with the switching mechanism, such as when the ball flows down, and the case passes through a position where the gaming ball can come into contact when the switching mechanism operates.

<Feature 51>
In the gaming machine according to feature 50,
After the waiting time has elapsed, the operation pattern of the distribution mechanism by the operation control means and the operation end condition are the same, and the round starts according to the length of the waiting time corresponding to the type of the special gaming state. The specification by the distribution mechanism is different at the timing when the enterable state occurs after the preparation condition is satisfied and the game ball via the switching mechanism reaches the distribution mechanism after the round start preparation condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that a gaming ball enters an area varies depending on the length of the waiting time.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 51, even if the operation control of the distribution mechanism in the specific round is the same, the gaming ball enters the specific area by changing the length of the waiting time before the start of the specific round. The probabilities can be different. Therefore, at least a part of the control pattern that allows the game ball to enter the specific area by the motion control means for a plurality of types of special gaming states can be easily shared, and the control can be further simplified. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the probability of the gaming ball entering a specific area that affects the transition of the gaming state while suppressing the cost increase of the gaming machine.

<Feature 52>
In the gaming machine according to feature 50 or 51,
As the control of the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state, the motion control means has different lengths of the waiting time, from the start of the plurality of rounds to the establishment of the end condition in each round. A gaming machine characterized in that the operation patterns of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism generate a special gaming state in which the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state have the same settings.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 52, the operation patterns from the start of a plurality of rounds in the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state until the end condition of each round is satisfied are set to be the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to standardize the control of a plurality of types of special gaming states having different entry probabilities to a specific area.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 52, the start of a plurality of rounds may be a timing for shifting to an entry-allowed state in which the gaming ball can enter a predetermined winning opening where the winning condition is satisfied, and the predetermined winning opening It may be set to either 1 or 2 or more.

<Feature 53>
In the gaming machine described in feature 52,
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery (for example, a big hit symbol random number counter and a big hit symbol initial value random number counter), and
It is provided with information display means (for example, special symbol display devices 471 and 472 related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) for displaying display information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.
The operation control means has both the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state when a predetermined display information (stop symbol identification value) is stopped and displayed as the display information on the information display means. A gaming machine characterized by being set to generate.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 53, even if the predetermined display information is stopped and displayed by the information display means, two types of special gaming states having different probabilities of whether or not the gaming ball enters a specific area occur. .. Therefore, it is possible to complicate the transition control of the game state and diversify the game without increasing the pattern of the display information corresponding to the winning for the predetermined lottery. In addition, the operation control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism during the special game state when the same display information is stopped and displayed can be easily standardized, and is given to the player for the same type of display information. The apparent value can be made almost the same so that the player is less likely to be dissatisfied.

<Feature 54>
In the gaming machine described in feature 53,
When the predetermined display information is stopped and displayed on the information display means, the motion control means is from the time when the start condition of the game in which the predetermined display information is stopped and displayed is satisfied to the end of the game. A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined whether to execute the first special gaming state or the second gaming state according to the type of the gaming state at a predetermined timing.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 54, when the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed, the transition probability of the gaming state that shifts after the special gaming state according to the gaming state at the predetermined timing in the variation display. Can add different playability. Therefore, while diversifying the transition pattern of the gaming state, it is possible to suppress the increase in the types of display information and the complicated control of the special gaming state, and the cost increase of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 54, the predetermined timing may be the timing at which the start winning prize is generated for the variation display in which the predetermined display information is stopped and displayed, or the variation in which the predetermined display information is stopped and displayed. The timing may be the timing at which the display is started, or the timing at which the variable display in which the predetermined display information is stopped and displayed ends.

Further, determining whether to execute the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state according to the type of the gaming state is the first special gaming state that completely corresponds to the type of the gaming state. Which of the second special gaming states may be executed, and whether to execute the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state is determined according to the probability set in the type of the gaming state. Alternatively, it may be determined from a gaming state including a special gaming state different from the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state.

<Feature 55>
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features 50 to 54,
The distribution mechanism is provided in a flow path leading from the entrance of the game area to the specific area (a path leading to the entrance of the specific passage TA via the connection passage KD), and the game ball can enter the specific area. It is a downstream distribution mechanism (distribution mechanism 601, 1601) capable of transitioning between a possible state and an inaccessible state in which the game ball does not enter the specific area.
The switching mechanism is provided on the upstream side of the flow path with respect to the downstream distribution mechanism at a position separated by a path that requires at least a predetermined shortest flow time, and is located on the downstream side along the flow path. It is an upstream distribution mechanism (upper entry control mechanism 454, 1454 of the upper prize winning device 434, 1434) that can shift between a flowable state in which the game ball can flow down to the distribution mechanism side and a flowable state in which the game ball does not flow down.
As the operation control means
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a lottery related to a special symbol is won), the upstream side distribution mechanism is placed in the flow impossible state, and the upstream side distribution mechanism is set after the flow impossible period. The upstream control means (control unit of the upper entry control mechanism 454, 1454) that generates the flowable period in which the flowable state is possible, and
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the downstream distribution mechanism is provided in a period including at least a preset enterable period after the shortest approachable time after the shortest flowable time has elapsed from the start of the flowable period. Downstream side accessible control means (control unit of distribution mechanism 601 and 1601 by main control board 920) that controls the enterable state and enables the game ball to enter the specific area.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the inaccessible state of the downstream distribution mechanism is generated in the inaccessible period earlier than the inaccessible shortest time, and the inaccessible state is shifted to the inaccessible state earlier than the inaccessible shortest time. The gaming machine is characterized in that a downstream side inaccessible control means (control unit of the distribution mechanism 601, 1601 by the main control board 920) for making the gaming ball inaccessible to the specific area is provided.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 55, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, even if the gaming ball enters a specific area by the control of the downstream side inaccessible control means, it is controlled by the downstream side inaccessible control means. Even if the game ball does not enter the specific area, both the upstream side distribution mechanism and the downstream side distribution mechanism operate, so there is a possibility that the game ball will advance to the specific area if certain conditions are met. It is possible to show something in an easy-to-understand manner through the visual sense of the player.

In particular, even when the game ball does not enter the specific area by the control of the downstream side impossibility control means, the downstream side distribution mechanism generates an approachable state. For this reason, the game ball flows down from the upstream side distribution mechanism toward the downstream side distribution mechanism that is in an accessible state, and it is possible to give the player an opportunity to pay attention to the behavior of the game ball. .. Therefore, the result of the lottery corresponding to the subsequent entry destination of the gaming ball can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state can be suitably notified to the player by using the flow of the gaming ball. Machines can be provided.

<Feature 56>
In the gaming machine according to the feature 55,
As a gaming state in which the predetermined condition can be satisfied, a plurality of gaming states including the advantageous gaming state are provided.
As the plurality of gaming states, the execution ratios of the downstream side enterable control means and the downstream side inaccessible control means are different when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the probability that the advantageous gaming state occurs is different. A gaming machine characterized by including states (normal gaming state, probabilistic gaming state, and time-saving gaming state).

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 56, since the probability that an advantageous gaming state occurs differs depending on the gaming state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is advantageous with a sense of expectation according to the playing gaming state being executed. It can be expected that a gaming state will occur. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving an intonation to the expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state.

In the gaming machine according to the feature 55, the plurality of gaming states differ in any one of the probability of satisfying a predetermined condition and the ease of entry of the gaming ball into a predetermined starting area, or a combination thereof. It may have a kind of gaming state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature 56, display information (first special symbol and second special symbol) is displayed as a result of executing variable display when a gaming ball enters and whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. ) Is set and a plurality of starting areas are set corresponding to each display information, when a predetermined condition is satisfied according to the starting area in which the game ball has entered in a plurality of gaming states. It is also possible that the execution ratios of the downstream side enterable control means and the downstream side inaccessible control means are different, and the probability that the game ball enters the specific area and an advantageous gaming state is generated is different.

<Feature 57>
In the gaming machine according to feature 56,
The upper winning openings (upper large winning openings 434A, 1434A) through which the game ball can enter when the upstream side distribution mechanism controls whether or not to enter and the upstream side distribution mechanism is in the flow impossible state.
The accessability is controlled by the downstream distribution mechanism, and when the downstream distribution mechanism is in the approachable state, the lower winning openings (lower large winning openings 433A, 1433A) into which the game ball can enter Equipped with
The specific area is configured to be accessible through the lower winning opening.
The upstream distribution mechanism is in a flowable state in which a game ball can flow down to the downstream distribution mechanism side in a normal gaming state, and the flow impossible state is generated during a part of the special gaming state to generate an upper side. It allows the game ball to enter the winning opening,
The motion control means controls the motion of the upstream side distribution mechanism and the downstream side distribution mechanism according to the types of conditions set as the predetermined conditions, and whether or not the game ball can enter the specific area. A gaming machine characterized by controlling.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 57, since the gaming ball enters the upper winning opening in a situation where the upstream distribution mechanism is in a state of being unable to flow, the specific region is located on the downstream side of the flow path. On the other hand, the firing operation can be adjusted according to the situation in which a prize is generated in the upper winning opening. Then, the game ball can be made to enter a specific area through the lower winning opening by simply continuing the firing operation in which the winning is generated in the upper winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player mistakenly performs the firing operation to invalidate the generation of an advantageous gaming state.

<Feature 60>
With a distribution mechanism (distribution mechanism 601, 1601) capable of distributing a game ball to a plurality of areas including a specific area (specific passage TA) and generating an enterable state in which the game ball can enter the specific area. ,
An operation control means (control unit of the distribution mechanism 601 and 1601 by the main control board 920) for controlling the operation of the distribution mechanism, and
When a game ball enters the specific area, a game state control means (a game state control unit on the main control board 920) that generates a specific game state that is more advantageous than when the game ball does not enter the specific area.
A ball holding means (ball transport device 602, which is provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and holds a game ball flowing down a flow path leading to the specific area within a predetermined range when a power failure occurs. A gaming machine characterized by having movable projecting pieces S1 to S5).

A conventional gaming machine is equipped with a variable winning device that allows an entry of a gaming ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a player when the gaming ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area. There are known gaming machines that are in an advantageous gaming state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-028117).

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the power supply to the inside of the gaming machine is unexpectedly stopped due to a power failure or the like, the backup function makes the gaming machine almost the same as the state when the power supply is stopped. Even if the control is restored from the state of, the player may suffer a disadvantage.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 60, there is provided a gaming machine capable of reducing the possibility that the player suffers a disadvantage with respect to the entry of the gaming ball into a specific area that generates a gaming state advantageous to the player. can do. That is, when a power failure occurs in a situation where the game ball that should have passed through the specific area is flowing down the flow path leading to the specific area, the game ball is held within a predetermined range by the ball holding means at the time of power failure. be able to. Therefore, after the power of the gaming machine is restored, the flow of the gaming ball toward the specific area can be restarted to facilitate the entry of the gaming ball into the specific area, and the game can be legitimately played due to an unforeseen situation. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a person suffers a disadvantage.

<Feature 61>
In the gaming machine according to feature 60,
The ball holding means at the time of a power failure is a gaming machine characterized by holding a gaming ball at a plurality of locations along the flow path.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 61, since the gaming ball can be held separately on the upstream side and the downstream side along the flow path leading to the specific area, the game ball flows down toward the specific area on the downstream side. It is possible to hold the game ball that has been used and prevent the game ball that originally flows down to the downstream side from the timing of entering the specific area on the upstream side. Therefore, the situation of whether or not the game ball flows down to a specific area corresponding to the transition control of the game state determined before the power failure is saved in the game area, and it is easy to restore the flow of the game ball after the power is restored. Can be done.

<Feature 62>
In the gaming machine according to feature 60 or 61,
It is provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and is provided with a switching mechanism (upper prize winning device 434, 1434, lower prize winning device 433, 1433) that can switch whether or not to advance the game ball to the specific area side.
The gaming machine characterized in that the ball holding means at the time of a power failure holds the game ball on the downstream side of the switching mechanism and on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 62, the gaming ball heading to a specific area can be efficiently held during a power failure by limiting the gaming ball to the distribution mechanism side by the switching mechanism, which is determined before the power failure. It is possible to efficiently restore the flow of a gaming ball corresponding to the transition control of the gaming state after a power failure.

<Feature 70>
A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state in which a winning condition that gives a gaming value more easily than a normal gaming state is satisfied when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, and the special gaming state is a combination of multiple rounds. In a gaming machine configured with
A swing that can distribute a game ball to a plurality of areas including a specific area (specific passage TA) and can generate an accessible state in which the game ball can enter the specific area in at least a part of the plurality of rounds. Distribution mechanism (distribution mechanism 601, 1601) and
A switching mechanism (upper grand prize device 434, 1434, lower grand prize device) provided on the upstream side or the downstream side of the distribution mechanism and capable of switching whether or not to advance the game ball to the winning area where the winning condition is satisfied. 433, 1433) and
An operation control means (control unit of the upper prize winning device 434, 1434 and the distribution mechanism 601, 1601 in the main control board 920) that controls the operation of the switching mechanism and the distribution mechanism to generate the special gaming state.
When the game ball is guided to the specific area, the game state control means (the control unit of the game state in the main control board 920) to generate a specific game state which is more advantageous than the case where the game ball is not guided to the specific area. Equipped with
A special gaming state including one or more rounds is provided prior to the predetermined round that causes the enterable state.
When the predetermined round is started, the distribution mechanism can be reached from before the timing at which the game ball reaches the distribution mechanism that is in an approachable state in the predetermined round to after the timing. It is characterized by being provided with a launch continuation control means (a control unit of the fifth round in which the number of allowed entry is different from that before the fourth round by the main control board 920) for controlling the continuation of the launch of the gaming ball. Pachinko machine.

A conventional gaming machine is equipped with a variable winning device that allows an entry of a gaming ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a player when the gaming ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area. There are known gaming machines that are in an advantageous gaming state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-028117).

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, whether or not the gaming ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area is defined by a substantially constant probability according to the allowed entry operation of the gaming ball into the variable winning device. There is room for improvement in the form in which the game ball enters a specific area.

Further, even if an advantageous situation occurs for a player in which the game ball easily enters a specific area, if the player does not perform the firing operation, the advantageous situation may be wasted. It is possible that some players will suffer disadvantages. That is, it is preferable to use a gaming machine capable of allowing the player to preferably perform a firing operation in order to allow the gaming ball to enter a specific area, and there is still room for improvement.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 70, when a predetermined round for generating an enterable state in which a gaming ball can enter a specific area is started in at least a part of a plurality of rounds, the pachinko machine enters in the predetermined round. Control for continuing the firing of the gaming ball so that it can reach the distribution mechanism from before the timing when the gaming ball reaches the possible distribution mechanism to after the timing is performed by the firing continuation control means. Will be. For this reason, the player intentionally stops the launch of the game ball at the timing when it is necessary to continue the launch of the game ball in the special game state, and the game is performed on the distribution mechanism that is in an approachable state in a predetermined round. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball does not reach and the player suffers a disadvantage.

<Feature 71>
In the gaming machine described in feature 70,
The firing continuation control means has an allowable number of times that the winning condition of the round executed immediately before the predetermined round is satisfied for one or a plurality of rounds executed two or more times before the predetermined round. A gaming machine characterized by performing control to generate different special gaming states.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 71, the round to be executed immediately before the predetermined round has a different permissible number of times that the winning condition is satisfied from the previous rounds, so that the player can determine the winning condition. Even if the game is played while counting the number of fired balls so as not to fire more game balls than the number of times the game is established, extra game balls are likely to be fired straddling after the end of the immediately preceding round. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to continue firing the game ball so that the game ball flows down the game area immediately after the start of the predetermined round, so that the game ball can reach the distribution mechanism immediately after the start of the predetermined round. Can be easily generated, and it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 71, the round in which the allowable number of times that the winning condition is satisfied is small is compared with one or a plurality of rounds executed two or more times before the predetermined round, and the winning condition is satisfied. The allowed number of entry of the winning openings to be established may be reduced, or the maximum allowed entry time may be shortened.

<Feature 72>
In the gaming machine according to feature 70 or 71,
The motion control means controls a subsequent round after a predetermined interval time has elapsed between a plurality of rounds.
The firing continuation control means is performed before the execution of one or a plurality of rounds executed before the immediately preceding round, rather than the interval time before the execution of the immediately preceding round executed immediately before the predetermined round. A gaming machine characterized in that it controls to generate a special gaming state in which the interval time is longer.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 72, the special gaming state in which the interval time before the execution of one or more rounds executed before the execution of the immediately preceding round is longer than the interval time before the execution of the immediately preceding round. Occurs. When the player feels that the interval time is long, it is easy to stop the launch of the game ball in an attempt to suppress the useless launch of the game ball, and if the interval time is short, it is easy to continue the launch of the game ball without stopping the launch. .. Therefore, if the interval time is short before the execution of the immediately preceding round, it becomes easy to continue firing the game ball in an attempt to efficiently win the game ball even in the subsequent predetermined round. Therefore, it is possible to easily generate a situation in which the game ball can reach the distribution mechanism immediately after the start of a predetermined round, and it is easy to avoid a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage.

<Feature 73>
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features 70 to 72,
It is equipped with a launching means (launching device 330) that launches a game ball into a game area according to a fixed firing time interval by a predetermined firing operation by the player.
The firing continuation control means sets the interval time before the execution of one or a plurality of rounds including the execution of the immediately preceding round executed immediately before the predetermined round as a predetermined time equal to or less than the firing time interval. A gaming machine characterized by performing control to generate a special gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 73, the interval time is set to a predetermined time equal to or less than the firing time interval of the gaming ball. Therefore, it is difficult to generate useless game balls for which the winning conditions are not satisfied. Therefore, at least before the execution of the round immediately before the predetermined round, it is suggested to the player in advance that there is a possibility that the player is in a special gaming state in which the unnecessary launch of the game ball is suppressed even if the launch of the game ball is continued. can do. Therefore, it is easy for the game ball to continue to be launched from the end of the immediately preceding round to the start of a predetermined round, and it is easy to generate a situation in which the game ball can reach the distribution mechanism. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which profits are incurred.

<Feature 80>
A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state in which a winning condition that gives a gaming value more easily than a normal gaming state is satisfied when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, and the special gaming state is a combination of multiple rounds. In a gaming machine configured with
An approachable state (guided posture) in which a game ball can be distributed to a plurality of areas including a specific area (specific passage TA) and the game ball can enter the specific area in at least a part of the plurality of rounds. Distribution mechanism that can be generated (distribution mechanism 601, 1601) and
A switching mechanism (upper grand prize device 434, 1434) provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and capable of switching whether or not to advance the game ball to the distribution mechanism side.
The control unit of the operation control means (distribution mechanism 601, 1601 in the main control board 920 and the upper prize winning device 434, 1434) that controls the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism to generate the special gaming state. )When,
When a game ball enters the specific area, a game state control means (a game state control unit on the main control board 920) that generates a specific game state that is more advantageous than when the game ball does not enter the specific area.
Launch abnormality detection means (right-handed detection switch 603) that detects whether or not it is in a predetermined launch abnormality state, and
Anomaly response control means (timer update process S1210 of the main control board 920, process S1309 in which the upper prize is allowed, and processing S1309, which performs predetermined abnormality response control when the predetermined launch abnormality detection means detects the predetermined launch abnormality state. Equipped with processing S1310) during which the upper prize is prohibited
As the special game state, the first special game state (16R big hit (V non-winning) special game state) and the second special game state in which the probability that the game ball enters the specific area is higher than that of the first special game state. A game state (a special game state of 16R jackpot (V prize)) is provided.
When the predetermined launch abnormality detection means detects the predetermined launch abnormality state in at least a part of the second special gaming state, the abnormality response control means stops the progress of at least a part of the game and launches the game. A gaming machine characterized in that when an abnormal state is released, control is performed to advance a game that has stopped progressing.

A conventional gaming machine is equipped with a variable winning device that allows an entry of a gaming ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a player when the gaming ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area. There are known gaming machines that are in an advantageous gaming state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-028117).

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if a state in which the gaming ball can enter a specific area occurs, if the gaming ball is not launched normally at that timing, the opportunity to make a break becomes invalid and the player Could suffer a disadvantage.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 80, there is provided a gaming machine capable of reducing the possibility that the player suffers a disadvantage with respect to the entry of the gaming ball into a specific area that generates a gaming state advantageous to the player. can do. That is, when the second special gaming state occurs and the gaming ball is not normally launched and becomes a firing abnormal state, the progress of at least a part of the game is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the game ball is not launched in the situation where the game ball can enter the specific area, and it is easy to avoid the situation where the player who is playing the game legitimately suffers a disadvantage. ..

<Feature 81>
In the gaming machine according to feature 80,
The launch abnormality detecting means includes a ball detecting means which is a part of the game area and is provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and can detect the passage of a game ball flowing down to the distribution mechanism side.
The abnormality response control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the progress of at least a part of a game is controlled according to the detection result of a gaming ball by the ball detecting means.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 81, a situation in which the gaming ball is not flowing down to the distribution mechanism side is appropriately detected, and when a predetermined firing abnormality state occurs, control corresponding to the state is appropriate. Can be executed.

<Feature 82>
In the gaming machine according to feature 80 or 81,
A time information updating means for updating the time information corresponding to the progress of the special gaming state is provided.
The abnormality response control means stops the winning easy control when the predetermined firing abnormality state is detected in a situation where the winning easy control in which the winning condition is likely to be satisfied is executed by the operation control means. A gaming machine characterized in that the update of the time information by the time information updating means is stopped at the same time, and the progress of at least a part of the game is stopped.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 82, by suspending the generation of the advantageous state for the player, the advantageous state in which the winning condition is more likely to be satisfied as compared with other players has been generated for a long time. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a player who has been playing a game legitimately suffers a disadvantage without causing a misunderstanding.

<Feature 90>
A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state in which a winning condition that gives a gaming value more easily than a normal gaming state is satisfied when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, and the special gaming state is a combination of multiple rounds. In a gaming machine configured with
An approachable state (guided posture) in which a game ball can be distributed to a plurality of areas including a specific area (specific passage TA) and the game ball can enter the specific area in at least a part of the plurality of rounds. Distribution mechanism that can be generated (distribution mechanism 601, 1601) and
A switching mechanism (upper grand prize device 434, 1434) provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and capable of switching whether or not to advance the game ball to the distribution mechanism side.
The control unit of the operation control means (distribution mechanism 601, 1601 in the main control board 920 and the upper prize winning device 434, 1434) that controls the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism to generate the special gaming state. )When,
When a game ball enters the specific area, a game state control means (a game state control unit on the main control board 920) that generates a specific game state that is more advantageous than when the game ball does not enter the specific area.
A power failure detection means (a part of the power failure monitoring process S9202) for detecting whether or not a predetermined power failure state occurs, and
It is provided with a power failure control means (each process of the main control board 920 in a state where the power failure preparation flag is on) that performs a predetermined power failure response control when the predetermined power failure state is detected by the power failure detection means.
As the special game state, the first special game state (16R big hit (V non-winning) special game state) and the second special game state in which the probability that the game ball enters the specific area is higher than that of the first special game state. A game state (a special game state of 16R jackpot (V prize)) is provided.
The power failure control means is a special gaming state as the predetermined power failure response control in a predetermined period including a period in which the predetermined power failure state is detected by the power failure detecting means and the inaccessible state is generated. A gaming machine characterized by executing control to advance a power failure.

A conventional gaming machine is equipped with a variable winning device that allows an entry of a gaming ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a player when the gaming ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area. There are known gaming machines that are in an advantageous gaming state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-028117).

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if a state in which a gaming ball can enter a specific area occurs, if a power failure occurs at that timing, the opportunity for a break is invalidated, and the player is disadvantaged. There was a possibility of suffering. There was also the possibility that criminals would deliberately cut off the power supply to the gaming machines and try to gain unfair profits.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 90, there is provided a gaming machine capable of easily avoiding the inconvenience caused by the occurrence of a power failure with respect to the entry of the gaming ball into a specific area that generates a gaming state advantageous to the player. be able to. That is, even in a situation where a predetermined power failure state occurs, the control for advancing the special gaming state is executed in the predetermined period including the period for generating the enterable state. For this reason, the game ball that was supposed to enter the specific area does not enter the specific area due to the occurrence of a power outage, and the player who was playing the game legitimately suffers a disadvantage, or the criminal intentionally causes a power outage. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a fraudulent act aimed at unreasonably entering a game ball into a specific area is performed.

<Feature 91>
When the operation control means controls to generate the inaccessible state, the power failure control means is in the inaccessible state even before the inaccessible state is started even if the predetermined power outage state occurs. Equipped with a time information updating means (update processing of the special symbol-related control timer of the main control board 920 when the power failure preparation flag is on) for updating the time information corresponding to the progress of the special gaming state over the period until the end of A gaming machine characterized by being a power outage.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 91, even if a predetermined power failure state occurs, the time information can be continuously updated by the time information updating means for a period until the approachable state ends, so that a specific area can be used. It is possible to suppress the influence of the occurrence of a power outage on the entry of the game ball into the game, and it is possible to suitably avoid the inconvenience caused by the occurrence of the power outage.

<Feature 92>
A display means (decorative symbol display device 479) for displaying a predetermined lottery result including the lottery result related to the execution of the special gaming state, and
A display control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the display content of the display means is provided.
When the predetermined power failure state occurs, the power failure control means performs predetermined control including control of the display means by the display control means, and operation control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism by the operation control means. A gaming machine characterized in that it stops prior to some controls including.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 92, the power consumption due to the display control of the display means can be suppressed, and the amount can be distributed to a part of the control including the control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the progress of the game in the special game state regarding the entry of the game ball into the specific area by using the limited electric power.

<Feature A0>
A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state in which a winning condition that gives a gaming value more easily than a normal gaming state is satisfied when a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, and the special gaming state is a combination of multiple rounds. In a gaming machine configured with
An approachable state (guided posture) in which a game ball can be distributed to a plurality of areas including a specific area (specific passage TA) and the game ball can enter the specific area in at least a part of the plurality of rounds. Distribution mechanism that can be generated (distribution mechanism 601, 1601) and
A switching mechanism (upper grand prize device 434, 1434) provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism and capable of switching whether or not to advance the game ball to the distribution mechanism side.
The control unit of the operation control means (distribution mechanism 601, 1601 in the main control board 920 and the upper prize winning device 434, 1434) that controls the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism to generate the special gaming state. )When,
When a game ball enters the specific area, a game state control means (a game state control unit on the main control board 920) that generates a specific game state that is more advantageous than when the game ball does not enter the specific area is provided. Prepare,
As the special game state, the first special game state (16R big hit (V non-winning) special game state) and the second special game state in which the probability that the game ball enters the specific area is higher than that of the first special game state. A game state (a special game state of 16R jackpot (V prize)) is provided.
An approach suppressing means (ball transport device 602, power failure monitoring process S9202, lower prize winning device 2433) for suppressing the entry of a game ball into the specific area when the first special gaming state occurs is provided. A featured gaming machine.

A conventional gaming machine is equipped with a variable winning device that allows an entry of a gaming ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a player when the gaming ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area. There are known gaming machines that are in an advantageous gaming state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-028117).

In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when it is set to generate a plurality of types of gaming states (special gaming states) in which the probability that the gaming ball enters a specific area is different, the gaming ball enters the specific area in each special gaming state. It is preferable that the probability of this is according to the manufacturer's setting, and there is room for improvement in this regard.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature A0, in a special gaming state in which the probability that the gaming ball enters a specific area is set low, it is easy to avoid a situation in which the gaming ball accidentally enters the specific area. Can be provided. That is, in the first special gaming state in which the probability that the gaming ball enters the specific area is lower than that in the second special gaming state, the entry suppressing means suppresses the entry of the gaming ball into the specific area, so that the first special gaming state. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the manufacturer unreasonably obtains a profit set so that the player cannot obtain it when the above occurs.

<Feature A1>
In the gaming machine described in feature A0,
As a part of the second special gaming state, the motion control means allows a predetermined number of game balls set to at least two or more to advance from the distribution mechanism to the side where the specific region is provided. It is something to generate
The approach suppressing means is a gaming machine characterized in that when a predetermined number or more of game balls have advanced from the distribution mechanism to the specific area side during the progressable period, the game balls are made to enter the specific area.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature A1, the gaming balls can be made to enter the specific region only when a predetermined number of gaming balls set in a plurality of games have advanced to the side where the specific region is provided from the distribution mechanism. Therefore, in a situation where one game ball accidentally advances to the specific area side from the distribution mechanism, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the specific area.

In addition, at least one feature described in features 10 to A1 may be applied in combination with any other feature or a plurality of other features. The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied.

Pachinko machine: A launching operation means operated by a player, a gaming ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the launching operating means, a passage portion for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined gaming area, and a pachinko machine. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in the gaming area, and grants a privilege to the player when the gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: A player starts the rotation of the orbiting body based on the operation of the starting operation means, stops the rotation of the orbiting body based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and responds to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that gives special benefits to.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for gaming machines such as ball gaming machines.

100 ... Game machine, 330 ... Launcher, 400, 1400 ... Game board, 433, 1433 ... Lower prize winning device, 433A, 1433A ... Lower prize opening, 434, 1434 ... Upper prize winning device, 434A, 1434A ... Upper college Winning opening, 454, 1454 ... Upper entry control mechanism, 471 ... Special symbol display device related to the first special symbol, 472 ... Special symbol display device related to the second special symbol, 479 ... Decorative symbol display device, 601 and 1601 ... Minute mechanism, 602 ... Ball transport device, 603 ... Right-handed detection switch, 920 ... Main control board, 940 ... Sub control board, 2433 ... Lower prize winning device, KD ... Connection passage, S1 to S5 ... Movable protrusions, TA ... Specific passage

Claims (1)

A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined specific game start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined specific game start condition is satisfied.
A determination information display means that displays information corresponding to the determination result of the determination means, and
When it is determined by the determination means that the specific game start condition is satisfied, the combination of a plurality of unit games executed based on the satisfaction of the plurality of start conditions makes the player more comfortable with the normal gaming state. A gaming machine provided with a specific gaming state control means for generating an advantageous specific gaming state.
The specific game state control means generates a plurality of types of specific game states in which at least one of the content and the grant time of the privilege given to the player is different.
The determination means determines whether or not the specific game start condition set corresponding to the plurality of types of specific game states is satisfied, and determines whether or not the specific game start condition is satisfied.
The determination information display means displays information corresponding to a specific game state in which control is started by the specific game state control means in a unit game based on a start condition in which the specific game start condition is satisfied.
Before the specific gaming state is started, which of the plurality of types of specific gaming states is to be started is selected, and the information corresponding to the specific gaming state to be executed is displayed by the determination information display means. A gaming machine.

Images